Home

PathfinderPC Router Control Software

1. Finally click Finish to add the router into the system xi All Information has been collected for this Router Click Finish to Complete the Changes Next gt gt O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 28 Sigma Evertz Sigma and Evertz routers can route a variety of different types of audio and video signals Depending on the hardware installed these routers may have multiple routing levels Each level typically contains a single type of signal So for example a single router may have an audio routing card and a video routing card The audio and video may be routed together or the levels may each be routed individually PathfinderPC routes the individual levels exclusively and the user should use a virtual router in PathfinderPC to combine the points from the multiple levels together Therefore each level becomes its own router in PathfinderPC Server However since the control for all routers are a common port some configuration is necessary in PathfinderPC Server Typically in the setup in PathfinderPC Server we define one router which controls one level as the master Additional routers which control the additional levels are then defined as slaves of that level so that they know to use the control port of the master router level for communications First select whether this Router is a Level Master or Level Slave The first router created to communicate with the equi
2. Web Browser Supports video Meters Faders for VMIX Motorized Node Gain Clock P P lt PS P lt PS gt lt P P lt PS P lt PS gt lt SA Generic Bridge SA ACU Bridge gt gt gt gt VMIX Control Mixer Application SA Port Router Service Multicast Gpio Service gt gt O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 15 PathFinderPC PRO Server Installation 1 Run the PathfinderPC Server setup application to install the PathfinderPC Server Software Welcome to the PathFinderServer Setup Wizard i PathFinderServer 2 Click Next to begin the installation The installer will guide you through the steps required to install PathFinderServer on your computer Click Next to continue 3 Select I Agree to the license agreement and the Select Next to continue 4 Select the folder where WARNING This computer program is protected by copyright law and international treaties PathfinderPC Server should be Unauthorized duplication or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil or criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law installed Click Next to complete the installation After the PathfinderPC Server software is installed run it for the first time The software wil
3. Move Up Move Down Cut O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 82 Memory Slot PathfinderPC Server has 1000 memory slots available for Stack Event and custom scripting use Each slot is accessed using a name A memory slot holds a single textual value Enter the memory slot name into the correct field When using a memory slot the stack event will be analyzed every time the named memory slot s value changes The qualifier will be considered True if a slot with the assigned name exists and it contains the value specified If the slot does not exist or is a different value it will be considered False Negate reverses the qualifier state making the qualifier True if the memory slot value does not match and or the memory slot does not exist Name Memory Slot Negate E Slot Name MySlot Slot Value SomeValue C ay F Move Up Move Down Cut Copy Paste Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 83 Memory Matrix List PathfinderPC Server has 99 memory matrixes available for Stack Event and custom scripting use Each Matrix is accessed using a name A Memory matrix is basically a table with rows and columns Enter the memory table name into the correct field The memory matrix section allows you to enter a value The Value is in List Column option allows you to select a column number in gt the matrix and determine i
4. Actions If Not Met 0 Send E Mail ea Sends an e mail or SMS message A Run Script Mi Runs a PFS Script Delayed Actions If Not Met 0 Delay E seconds Ej uy Protocol Translator Command Triggers from the receiving of or sends a specified command gt E Move Up Move Down Cut Copy Paste Add Edt Remove Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 63 Double click on the GPIStateChange in the Qualifiers list to open the property editor for this qualifier DemoEventGroup StackingEventEditor E ES Select the properties in the property editor that are appropriate The arrow keys next to the drop down lists can be used to get more details for the drop down list item in question O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 64 1 OUTI OUT 1 ON Blement 001 051 172 16 1 51 Blement 001 051 EXC NE Element 001 2 3 OUT3 OUT 3 ON Element 001 051 172 16 151 Blement 001 051 3 172 16 1 51 3 4 OUT4 OUT 4 ON Element 001 051 172 16 1 51 Element 001 051 4 172 16 1 51 4 5 OUTS OUT 5 ON Element 001 051 172 16 1 51 Blement 001 051 5 172 16 1 51 5 6 OUTS OUT 6 ON Element 001 051 172 16 1 51 Element 001 051 6 172 16 1 51 6 7 OUT7 OUT 7 ON Element 001 051 172 16 1 51 Blement 001 051 7 172 16 1 51 7 8 OUTS OUT 8 ON Element 001 051 172 16 1 51 Blement 001 051 8 172 16 1
5. In the third example above there is a livewire channel number entered into the port In this case what we are saying is that this port will communicate with an Axia Mixing console when that console has the listed livewire channel number loaded to a fader or other console functionality The GPOs on this port will be tripped when certain actions take place on that console and the GPIs on this port will cause certain things to happen on that console We will call this Livewire Channel Based Routing There is much more detail in the Livewire and Element manuals on this subject Underneath the hood the two methods of routing GPIO closures above use different technologies within the Axia network In the IP Port example the GPIO device opens a TCP connection to the routed GPIO device and monitors the GPI pins tripping its own GPO pins In the Livewire Channel number example GPIO messages are sent as multicast messages in the same way as the Axia multicast audio traverses the network The Element and node then monitor the GPIO multicast channel for closures tagged with the correct Livewire Channel number So what is Pathfinder PC Server s role in all of this First of all PathfinderPC Server can monitor and control GPIO pins on any of these ports using its event system This is described in the standard and stack events sections of this document Second PathfinderPC Server can route closures In this case PathfinderPC Server uses the IP Port routing m
6. It is important to dispel myths and misunderstandings about Pathfinder s role in Axia audio and GPIO routing Pathfinder is merely a control application that changes the routes on the network as far as which source is routed to which destination The audio and GPIO data does not actually pass through Pathfinder Instead Pathfinder merely tells a destination port what to listen for and the Axia equipment and network switch does all of the rest Before setting up the Axia system within Pathfinder it is important to be sure that all Axia Devices are turned on and connected to the Switch and that the PC which runs PathfinderPC Server is connected to that switch as well It is also important that each Axia device in the system has a unique IP Address and name If you purchased your Axia System from a distributor or Systems Integrator that preconfigured your nodes then this has already been accomplished If this has not been accomplished it is highly recommended that you set up the Axia equipment according to the Axia documentation with ip addresses and basic channel numbers before configuring PathfinderPC Server Creating an Axia Audio Router will scan the network for Axia Audio resources to use in the router Creating an Axia GPIO Router will scan the network for Axia GPIO resources to use in the router Creating an Axia Port Mpeg router will search for Axia Port Mpeg resources Please note that the Axia IPort Mpeg router only works currently if the
7. One of the states involved in the qualifier section for the stack event has changed so the stack event is being analyzed to see if Actions need to be run StackEventQualifiersMet ID 5010 Group Type Stack Event Description All of the qualifiers for a particular stack event have been met StackEventQualifiersNotMet ID 5011 Group Type Stack Event Description The specified stack event has been analyzed due to a change in one of the qualifiers states and the qualifiers have not been met RunStackEventQualifiersNotMetActions ID 5012 Group Type Stack Event Description The stack event qualifiers have been analyzed and they have not been met so the actions specified for this condition are being run RunStackEventQualifiersMetActions ID 5013 Group Type Stack Event Description The stack event qualifiers have been analyzed and they have been met so the actions specified for this condition are being run RunStackEventQualifiersNotMetActionsDelayed ID 5014 Group Type Stack Event Description Delayed Actions are being run on a stack event whose qualifiers have been met RunStackEventQualifiersMetActionsDelayed ID 5015 Group Type Stack Event Description Delayed Actions are being run on a stack event whose qualifiers have not been met SilenceDetectEvent ID 5016 Group Type Event Description A silence detect event state has changed GPIOE vent ID 5017 O Software
8. Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 78 GPI State Change The GPI State Change qualifier allows you to select a GPI Source pin from a GPIO router and monitor its state Select the GPIO Router and the GPI Source to be monitored from the Router and GPI Source drop down lists Then select the Pin 1 through 5 to monitor and the state Low or High that will make the qualifier True A stack event using this qualifier will get analyzed every time the pin on the selected port changes its state from high to low or low to high If the pin state matches the one selected in the qualifier the qualifier will be considered True If it does not it will considered False Negate reverses the qualifier state effectively reversing the State option GPI 1 OUT 1 y Name GPIStateChange D te td Negate a 2 DanGPIO g gt l mj Router e B Ws Low High wi Input Closure State Move Up Move Down Cut GPO State Change The GPO State Change qualifier allows you to select a GPO Destination pin from a GPIO router and monitor its state Select the GPIO Router and the GPO Destination to be monitored from the Router and GPO Destination drop down lists Then select the Pin 1 through 5 to monitor and the state Low or High that will make the qualifier True A stack event using this qualifier will get analyzed every time the pin on the selected port changes its state
9. Avail ID Name Description 1 MyDestination This is my Destination 2 YourDestination This is your Destination 4 RouteStats Returns the routing state of a router in the system Aliases rs Command GetList RouteStats lt RouterNumber gt Example GetList RouteStats Return Columns Availability Follows destination availability and lock state SourcelD DestinationID Lock T or F Example BeginList RouteStats 1 2007 07 14_13 15 Avail SourceID 5 Scenes Returns the Scenes of a router in the system Aliases sc Command GetList Scenes lt RouterNumber gt Example GetList Scenes 1 Return Columns Availability Name Example BeginList Scenes 1 2007 07 14_13 15 22 Software Authority Inc Page 223 Avail Name 0 DanShowScene 0 MarkShowScene EndList 6 AxiaDevices Returns a list of Axia Devices in the system according to their type Aliases ad Command GetList AxiaDevices lt DeviceType gt If DeviceType is blank returns all Axia devices Available Device Types include AudioNode GPIO Driver Element Engine Fusion ZipOne Example GetList AxiaDevices Element Return Columns Availability Name IP Type Example BeginList AxiaDevices Element 2007 07 14_13 15 22_001 Avail Name IP Type 0 DanElement 172 16 1 4 Element 0 Studio3 172 16 1 5 Element EndList 7 ElementProfiles Returns a list of Profiles on a specific Element Aliases ep Com
10. Hetwork IP Base Add Hetwork IP Mask 172 16 1 254 255 255 0 0 To Find Livewire Terminals Automatically Click Scan Scan Stop Timeout 1 2 Second y PSIO 001 055 Omnia OHE AGHD 001 085 SADanWin satestserver ICOM 001 089 Engine 001 063 Element 001 051 ZephyriPort MulticastGpio z Hada NA Scan Progress Cancel lt lt Back Next gt gt Finish fm Clicking the AddMcast button will present a dialog box where you can add multicast gpio channels to the router MY Livewire Multicast Gpio Entry E x Enter a Multicast Gpio Livewire Channel Humber Enter multiples using commas and or hyphens 1 2 3 10 Once you have added the channel number you wish to use complete the router dialog to commit the new IOs into the router Now these IOs can be used in stack events standard events and any other gpio capabilities in the Pathfinder system Behind the scenes when these IOs are added to the router PathfinderPC Server connects to the multicast gpio service and provides it with a list of channel numbers to monitor The service then filters for changes on channels Pathfinder cares about and reports back to Pathfinder And Pathfinder can tell the service to send closures tagged with the correct channel number as well Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 203 Demo Limitations and Licensing The dem
11. You must select the router in the system that this translator will use It is recommended that virtual router be created with only the sources and destinations you wish to expose to this protocol translator in it Then select that Virtual Router from the drop down list in the configuration for this protocol translator Generic Protocol The generic protocol does not do any translation at all It is used to send and read commands into Stack Events Stack Events can be set up to perform certain actions when certain user defined textual commands are received through the translator and Stack Event Actions can be set up to send user defined commands back to a controlling device Sine ACU 1 Prophet Version The Sine ACU 1 Prophet Version translator is designed to act like the Prophet version of the Sine Systems ACU 1 switcher It converts the commands usually destined to an ACU 1 to a bank of VMIX channels on an Axia Element and a bank of GPIO ports on the Axia network An ACU 1 is comprised of 8 stereo Channels of audio inputs and a single stereo output Any Channel on the input side can be turned on and it will fade up to the predetermined level over a predetermined time period If multiple channels are turned on the ACU 1 will mix them together to the stereo output In that way the ACU 1 acts both as a switcher and as a mixer When the Channel is turned off it will fade down over a predetermined period of time as well In addition there are 8 output
12. Actions Not Met 0 ESO 2 1 Back Color Off 2 No Change Ell Button State Y No Change On OF Ed Actions If Met 0 Delayed Actions If Met 0 Delayed Actions If Not Met 0 Delay 5 seconds _ Flash No Change con Cor 1 Latching E Move Up Move Down Cut Copy Paste Add Edt Remove Enter a name for the qualifier if desired and enter the panel and button control name in the button name field in the form PanelName ButtonName In our example this should be DemoPanel DemoButton Make sure the KeyState is set to down and leave the other parameters as they are defaulted This means that the only property in the qualifier we are looking for is the button being down We could if we desired add additional aspects of the button qualification such as a specific state as will be called for in Example 3 If any of these other properties are set to anything other than No Change then they must also be in the correct state for the Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 70 qualifier to be evaluated as True Click OK Our qualifier will now be true whenever the user panel button is pressed on any open copy of the DemoPanel user panel in a client application or hardware device that is mapped to that panel control For Actions in the Actions if qualifiers are met section add an Action of type Activate Route and set the router to the correct audio router and the destination to the De
13. Control Port 11045 Commit Changes Cancel All Changes SA Port Router Service state ilRunning When the service is running you will be able to see each port its settings and its current state The state will show whether the port is connected listening open etc This is an excellent troubleshooting tool because you will be able to tell from this screen whether the system is connected to the remote host O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 197 Routing To make changes to the routing between the ports click on the routing tab UE SAPortRouter Configuration W Rouino Source ID Source Name TCPServer7000 Serial TCP SERVER PTCP CLIENT GPIO PORT mM TRASH Automatically Create Reverse Route Control Pot 11045 Commit Changes Cancel All Changes SA Port Router Service state Mmaa This tab allows the user to change source to destination port routing Click on any Destination and a pop up box will appear to select the source Select the source port and click activate or double click the source to complete the route This only activates the data flow in one direction To establish bi directional communication you need to make the reverse route as well Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 198 EJ SAPortRouter Configuration E Ports Routing Source ID Source Name Destination Name Locked 3 MyClient8000 TCPServer7000 1 False 0 None
14. Email Server Port SMTP 25 Email User Account to use to send mail henry mydomain com Example henry Password for Sending user account Example myEmailPassword From Address henry mydomain com Example henry yourdomain com PUIDClear This menu item clears certain unique identifiers for certain router resources It should only be used if advised by an Axia support engineer Clear Pathfinder Universal 1D List loj x Pathfinder creates unique IDs for certain sources and destinations when they are discovered These are stored so that if routers are deleted and recreated the sources and destinations will be given the same Pathfinder ID when they are discovered again This dialog will reset clear these counters for the selected router type Use with Caution O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 42 Licensing This menu item will display the licensing screen This screen will show your current license and license type as well as provide a link to the PathfinderPC license activation web site PathFinderPC Server License O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 43 View Menu Script Debugger The script debugger window is used when designing custom PathfinderPC scripts to view error and debugging messages MEE 2 Device List The device list will display all devices in a particular route
15. Port resources are set to multicast which requires multicast capbility on the mpeg side of the devices Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 22 Adding Axia Devices to the Routing Table Once the Axia Livewire type of router has been selected and a name and description has been assigned to the router the following wizard screen will be presented This screen is used to scan for Axia Devices on the LAN of the particular kind Audio or GPIO or Port Mpeg selected in the first step of the router addition process Select the IP address of the Network Card on your computer that is connected to the Axia switch Then click Scan spend 30 seconds listening for network The system will broadcasts of Axia equipment on the LAN It will then try to access and log into each of those devices to determine its capabilities and route lists E Livewire Router Setup Wizard x ties Utili Add Livewire Terminals Select Networks to Scan Network IP Base Add Network IP Mask 255 255 0 0 172 16 16 1 To Find Livewire Terminals Automatically Click Scan Scan Stop Timeout 1 2 Second Cancel lt lt Back Next gt gt Finish The devices that are found that match the router type you are adding will be displayed in the lower window When the scan is complete you should see all Axia Devices that have resources that match the router type you are adding For example if you are adding an Axia
16. Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 89 LWStreamFail This qualifier monitors a Destination for a loss of the livewire stream that is routed to it This is distinctly different from silence though it also indicates a silence condition A stream can remain active on the network and be broadcasting silence This monitors if the stream itself disappears and packets are not longer arriving or that stream Therefore this will also evaluate as true if the source is cleared from the destination so that no route exists Select the Router and Destination to monitor This qualifier will evaluate as True if the destination is no longer receiving a livewire stream This qualifier requires node software 2 6 12a or later and driver software 2 5 2 7 or later to function properly Negate will cause the qualifier to be True if a stream does exist and the destination is receiving a livewire stream Name LW Stream Fail Negate a EI jal e E Move Up Move Down O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 90 System Name System R This qualifier monitors a master timer used for TE ae otis Description various audio silence alarm timing purposes This qualifier was primarily used for testing and Negate debugging Master Timer Fail V No Change True False K Zip One Control Name ZipOneControl This qualifier monitors the
17. TCPServer9002 False TcPserver7000 MyClient8000 EXI COC None Serial4 False Serial PTCP SERVER TCP CLIENT GPIO PORT Pi TRASH Automatically Create Reverse Route Control Port 11045 SA Port Router Service State M Once the route is established data that comes in one port will be sent out any port that the source is routed to This happens no matter what style of port it is Multiplexing If you use the control or shift keys to select multiple source ports in the source selection window you will discover that it is possible to route multiple sources to the same destination This can be inherently dangerous in an uncontrolled environment because if multiple source ports are sending data simultaneously the data could get corrupted when it gets multiplexed together However this can be an extremely useful tool in a controlled environment For example if we have an automation system that needs to send serial port data to Pathfinder and the facility has a 2 server PathfinderPro cluster Port Router can be used to send the automation system data to both PathfinderPro servers Then we multiplex route the return data from both servers back to the single automation system serial port Finally in the Pathfinder cluster we set the protocol translator up to only work on the server that currently owns the event system Then clustering makes sure that only one server at any point in ti
18. Test your results Of course they should now only work if it is Monday Tuesday or Thursday and between 5 and 9 PM Example 3 Talkback Button Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 69 In this example we will use a stack event and a custom user panel to create a talkback button To run this example you must first create a custom user panel See the section of this document on the Panel Designer to create the panel The panel must have a name for the panel and a unique name for each control on the panel as this is what will be used in the stack event So for this demo create a panel called DemoPanel with a button called DemoButton Also for this example Destination 1 on Router 1 will be the headphone destination we are switching and Source 1 will be the program material and Source 2 will be the Talkback microphone Now as described in the previous section add a Stack Event group and give it a name or edit your existing group and add this as an additional stack event within that group Then add a UserButton Press qualifier HE DemoEventGroup StackingEventEditor Name DemoEventTalkback Other Details xl a Description Lata Logic Al Qualifier Details er Name Type ipti Name JUserButton Negate E Button Name DemoPanel DemoButton Host IP SSS Button Module A f gt Button Number a Delay 5 seconds gt ton Nunber AAA le Key State O No Change C Up Down al Button Caption aa a y
19. This command is issued by the server any time a route state changes Example gt gt RouteStat 1 2 0 False GPIStat lt RouterNumber gt lt DestinationNumber gt lt GPIState gt Indicates a GPI has changed See TriggerGPI for a description of the State Field Example gt gt GPIStat 2 3 Ihhhh GPOStat lt RouterNumber gt lt DestinationNumber gt lt GPIState gt Indicates a GPO has changed See TriggerGPO for a description of the State Field Example gt gt GPOStat 2 3 Ihhhh MemorySlot lt SlotNumber gt lt Tab gt lt SlotName gt lt Tab gt lt SlotValue gt This message will appear is memory slot changes have been subscribed to using the subscribe memory command It indicates a memory slot has changed Example gt gt MemorySlot0 MySlot MyValue O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 218 Appendix B GetList Function for Protocol Translator Overview This function will be available through the Software Authority Protocol Translator and will provide lists of available objects of different types to third party developers and outside control and Ul applications It will provide lists of routers sources destinations Elements etc This specification is a work in progress To use this function see the PathfinderPCServer instructions on how to add a Software Authority Protocol Translator into the system You be logged into the translator with a valid user name and password before the GetList Function will be av
20. URL Defines the URL to display in the web browser Clock Control Properties Type This defines the object type as Clock and cannot be changed by the designer Name Defines the name of the Clock control This name will be used to identify the control in stack events in the form PanelName ControlName Caption Sets the textual information to be displayed in the Clock This is not used at this point in time Height The height of the control Change this parameter by right clicking on the control and resizing it or manually editing this property value If the clock is Analog the height and width will be forced to be equal If it is set to Digital height and width may be different Width Displays the width of the control Change this parameter by right clicking on the control and resizing it or manually editing this property value If the clock is Analog the height and width will be forced to be equal If it is set to Digital height and width may be different Top Displays the position of the top edge of the control on the panel Change this parameter by right clicking on the control dragging it to a new location or manually editing this property value Left Displays the position of the left edge of the control on the panel Change this parameter by right clicking on the control dragging it to a new location or manually editing this property value BackColor Defines the background color of the clock This color will be overridden if a picture is
21. You can also create additional panels and save them to the folder and they will be available to these applications Remember that the MapRouter Source Destination is only one thing you can do with the panels You could also leave these fields blank and use Stack Event qualifiers to determine the button functions The section on latching buttons in the Stack Event part of this document is a good example In addition the detailed property descriptions below will provide more insight on the huge variety of functions these controls can perform To continue our example open the Panel you were just designing in Panel Designer again One of the other powerful features of these panels is that once created their button functions can be mapped to actual hardware controls as well using either GPIO circuits or Axia Element User Panel buttons To accomplish this select the button you wish to map to a hardware control and then find the HWMapType property and select the Button Label or GPIO button option You then must select a different property for the change to update Essentially you must leave the property for the change to get written into the panel definition This is true of most of the properties The Button option means that this button will get mapped to an Axia User Panel button The Label property means that this button will be mapped to the LCD display of an Axia User Panel The GPIOButton option means that it will map to a GPIO Circuit You will not
22. a video router and a machine control router Using PathFinderPC and PathFinderPC Server they create connections and set up each of the three routers on the server At this point the users can use the Routers menu in PathFinderPC to switch between each of the routers and quickly make audio video or machine control routes However the grumbling engineers after tasting the speed of not having to walk to a central place to make their routes complain it s still not enough Because that s just what grumbling engineers do They want to be able to make one click of a mouse and route audio video and machine control from their DAWs digital audio workstations to any video deck in the machine room all at once This is where the Virtual Router excels Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 158 A Virtual Router may be created Create a new point in the Destination field the device input side by clicking on the Add Route button under the Destinations list Assign it a patch name of Digital Beta Video Deck Input Then select the Audio router from the router name drop down combo Select the correct audio point for the DBeta s input from the router Point drop down combo Click Add Destination Next Select the Video Router from the router name drop down combo Select the correct video input point for the DBeta from the router point list that is now displaying the list of routes for the Video router since that is what is selected above Click
23. be changing the gain of an IO on a node or a VMIX buss or the fader on a console Some Mix engine sources and destinations may not be changed by PathfinderPC Server at this point in time Move Up Move Down araon F PS IO DST 1 s gt po vor On Of O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 105 LW Mute On AES Loss Nene LWMuteOnAESLoss This action will change the Livewire Mute on Description a AES Loss property in an Axia device that has AES Device 172 16 155 PSIO 001 055 aj 7 AES resources and supports this property OTT Select the device and set the property to Mute C Disabled Enabled enabled or disabled This will change this property when the action is executed Move Up Move Down Cut Copy Paste Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 106 Zip One Control This Action allows a variety of settings to be changed on a Zip One It can also drop a connection or establish a connection from the local buddy list of connections Y No Change Y No Change Y No Change Y No Change Codec MinBitrate kbps No Change Codec MaxBitrate kbps 4 No Change g E 4 Codec RevBuffer Min ms No Change Codec RevBuffer Max ms Y No Change Audio Input Source 4 No Change Analog In Left Y No Change Analog Input Right Y No Change Audio Microphone Ga
24. specific studio and map only the points on the master router to which the specific room should have access Virtual routers can also be used to marry points from different kinds of routers together For example the PathfinderPC administrator could create a source in a virtual router that has a source from a real audio router a source from a real GPIO router and a source from a real video router as a single virtual machine source The same can be done on the destination side Then when a route on the virtual router is made audio video and GPIO will all travel together This is much like the level concept some routers use except that it is totally dynamic in the way it can be defined by the PathfinderPC Administrator 1 To begin setting up your PathfinderPC system click on the Add Router button on the Server 2 Select the Type of Router to add to the system The drop down list displays a list of the routers which are currently supported by PathfinderPC The server can provide control for any of these routers and can even provide access for multiple types of routers at the same time 3 Click Next to be presented with a screen to enter a name and description for the router 4 Click Next after entering the name and description by which the logical router will be known within the PathfinderPC system and you will be presented with a series of screens that will be different depending on the kind of router
25. to continue Click I Agree to the license Click Next again Select the location for installing the application WARNING This computer program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized duplication or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil or criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law Click Next a final time to finish the installation procedure Cancel Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 145 PathfinderPC Main Application After installing PathfinderPC PC be sure the server application is set up and running on the server PC and then start PathfinderPC PC After a few seconds one or two messages will appear that there is an error connecting to the server Click OK on these and then select the Connect To Server menu item under the File menu This will present the following window Enter the IP address or fully qualified DNS name of the computer running the server application The port should match the Master TCP IP Socket number in the The default is 5200 If this has been changed on the server you will need to change it server application here to match Click Connect Connect To Server DOS IP Address 270001 Port 15200 Connect If the connection is successful all of the menu items on the main Patch Bay Control screen
26. unit but just informing the database as to what password each unit needs for access Click Next when all passwords have been assigned Livewire Router Setup Wizard x Utilities Store Terminal Passwords to Database In order for this system to access and make changes to the Livewire Terminals the System needs to know the Password for each Livewire Terminal Select the Terminals in the list and then click Set Password to program the Password into the database PowerSt 001 053 PSIO 001 055 Romulus Engine 001 061 Engine 001 063 Omnia8x 001 069 172 16 1 53 93 172 16 1 55 93 172 16 1 60 93 172 16 1 61 93 172 16 1 63 93 172 16 1 69 93 177 46 1 83 93 At this point the system will attempt to log in to each Axia device in the System using the defined password If it fails to log into any of the units you will see False in the Login Success column for that unit You may click Back to correct the problem Once all terminals have the correct password programmed into the database and the system can correctly log into each terminal Click Finish to finish adding the Axia Livewire router to the Router table w Livewire Router Setup Wizard Utilities x PowerSt 001 0 172 16 1 53 93 PSIO 001 055 172 16 1 55 93 True Romulus 172 16 1 60 93 True Engine 001 061 172 16 1 61 93 True Engine 001 063 172 16 1 63 93 True Omnia8x 001 0 172 16 1 69 93 True 177 16 1 83 93 True E
27. 2 Events_1_EASTest Device 172 16 1 201 1 3 2 Events_1_EASTest Device 172 16 1 60 60 1 2 ProtTrans_1_ACU1_Prophet 61 1 2 ProtTrans_1_ACU1_Prophet 62 l 2 ProtTrans_1_ACU1_Prophet 63 1 2 ProtTrans_1_ACU1_Prophet 64 l 2 ProtTrans_1_ACU1_Prophet 65 1 2 ProtTrans_1_ACU1_Prophet 66 1 2 ProtTrans_1_ACU1_Prophet 67 1 2 ProtTrans_1_ACU1_Prophet gt gt SnapShots lt RouterNumber gt Returns Names of all SnapShots on a Router Snapshots are also referred to as scene changes Begin SnapshotNames lt RouterNumber gt lt NUM1 gt Namel lt NUM2 gt Name2 lt NUM3 gt Name3 End SnapshotNames lt RouterNumber gt Example gt gt snapshots snapshots 1 Begin SnapshotNames 1 1to4 Almost1To8 BadRoute Clear 1 And2 ForCharles ForDan Test End SnapshotNames gt gt SourceNames lt RouterNumber gt Returns Names of all Source Points on a Router Minimally the command will return the Number of the point in the router and the name There may be additional tab delineated fields after the name depending on the type of router For example Axia audio routers will also return a description field host ip field Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 212 hostname Host IO number IO Address channel number and stream address There will be a space between the number and the first field All fields after the first field are tab delineated Begin SourceNames lt RouterNumber gt lt NUM1 gt
28. 242 It is possible that you may not see 8 submixers on the left or all of the faders for a particular submixer on the right This would be the case if your Administrator has configured VMIXControl to be limited only to the submixers and or faders you are supposed to use Master faders are designated by a red slider Using a Fader Source Selection The very top field lists the source that is assigned to each fader If you click in this field you will get a list of the sources that are available to be assigned to the fader In this way you can dynamically change the fader assignments Eo PFID Name Description Location ae a El 0 None Clear Route 1 An_1 An_1ON LivewireAnig 172 16 1 201 1 239 192 78 133 20101 2 An2 An_20N LivewireAnig 172 16 1 201 2 239 192 78 134 20102 3 M3 An_30N LivewireAnig 172 16 1 201 3 239 192 78 135 20103 4 an_4 An_4ON LivewireAnlg 17216 1 201 4 239 192 78 136 20104 5 An5 An_5 ON LivewireAnig 172 16 1 201 5 239 192 78 137 20105 6 An 6 An_6 ON LivewireAnig 172 16 1 201 6 239 192 78 138 20106 7 An_7 An_7ON LivewireAnig 172 16 1 201 7 239 192 78 139 20107 I 9 Pam 1 Pam 1 ON Livewire 172 16 1 60 1 239 192 23 113 6001 20108 10 Pom 2 Pgm 2 ON Livewire 172 16 1 60 2 _ 239 192 23 114 6002 1 CR Montor CR Monttor ON Livewire 172 16 1 60 8 239 192 23 132 6020 12 CR Headphn CR Headphn ON Livewire 172 16 1 60 9 239 192 23 142 6030 Se master
29. Add Destination Finally repeat the procedure to add the Machine Control Point Last click the Done button to add the point into the configuration Next repeat the same procedure under the Sources List Device outputs and make a point for the DAW You could also create an output point for the DBeta and an input point for the DAW so that routing could take place in both directions Finally once all desired points are created click the Create Close button to submit the new router design to the server At this point the Virtual router will then appear in the list of Routers in the Routers Menu Open the new virtual router Now if the engineers route DAW1 Out to DBeta IN Audio video and Machine Control are routed simultaneously Finally a scene could be created which makes two routes on the virtual router to route both the output of the DAW 1 to the Input of the DBeta and the output of the DBeta to the input of the DAW1 with one mouse click and all of the audio video and machine control would follow In this way the virtual routers may be used to create any routing scenario among the various routers imaginable O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 159 Search Functions With large routing systems it will often be necessary to search for route points This can be accomplished either through the search part of the routing toolbar or by selecting Search from the File Menu Enter the search phrase into the text box and
30. Click Next Again Depending on the type of protocol translator being created different of configuration wizard windows may appear at this stage before the final protocol translator name screen below These windows and their configuration information are described in the respective sections of the manual below After completing these steps you will arrive at this final window to finish creating the protocol translator O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 110 Finally add a name and description for es Protocol Translator Setup a Oj x the translator Select a Name and Description for this Translator In addition on this final screen you can select whether the translator will be Translator Name open and responding to commands and Description connection attempts whenever the server Always run this translator is running or only when the event C Start and Stop With Event aoe system is running This is useful in a Cluster where you may only want the Startup State Enabled translator answering on the machine that Waka Come _ Sleep Command currently owns the event system In addition the translator may have three Status Priority High y different initial states when the server z starts up Enabled Disabled or B lt lt Back Next gt gt Finish Sleeping If enabled the translator is open and listening for connections If Disabled then the tran
31. Copyright 2007 by TLS Corporation Published by Axia Audio We reserve the right to make improvements or changes in the prod ucts described in this manual which may affect the product speci cations or to revise the manual without notice All rights reserved Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 2 O Software Authority Inc Notice All versions claims of compatibility trademarks etc of hardware and software products not made by Axia mentioned in this manual or accompanying material are informational only Axia makes no endorsement of any particular product for any purpose nor claims any responsibility for operation or accuracy Warranty This product is covered by a one year limited war ranty the full text of which is included in the rear section of this manual Service When calling regarding PathfinderPC we strongly recommend being near your computer when you call so our Support Engineers can verify information about your computer your configuration and the conditions under which the problem occurs Have your serial number handy prior to calling About This Manual This manual covers the details of the Axia Pathfin derPC software for use with computers running the Windows operating system However it is assumed in this document that you are familiar with Livewire s basic concepts as outlined in the companion Intro duction to Livewire manual If you have not done so please re
32. Critical 3 Error 4 Warning 5 Notice 6 Informational 7 Debug Message ID Number Each message type within the PathfinderPC Server System is given an ID number A user who is analyzing the logs can import them into Excel or Access or another log analysis tool and search for particular types of events Each ID number is 4 digits There are several sections of messages and each uses a different first digit Therefore the 1000 through 1999 ID messages belong to one section and the 2000 through 2999 belong to a different section of messages The sections and each message number along with a description of the message are listed later in this document Message Source This lists the source device or engine in the system which generated the message This could be a variety of different items from a particular router number within the server to the event engine to the clustering system etc This source could have several elements separated by colons For example a route change event might have a source that looks like Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 118 Router 2 TestGPIO This means that the source of the message is router 2 in the system which is also named TestGPIO Remote Device If the message involves a remote device the device will be listed in this column For example on an Axia network this column might list the IP address and port of a particular Axia node that to which the log message refers Message D
33. DanLivewire Studio_4 ON DanLivewire Studio_1 ON DanLivewire Studio_1 ON DanLivewire Studio_1 ON DanLivewire SAWIAO 1 ON SAVIAO gt Studio_3 ON DanLivewvire None gt SAVIAO 2 ON SA None gt SAWIAO 3 ON SAS None gt SAWIAO 4 ON SAS None gt SAWIAO 5 ON SAS None gt SAWIAO 6 ON SAS None gt SAWIAO 7 ON SAS None gt SAWIAO 8 ON SAS None gt SAVI40 9 ON SAS None gt SA4WIAO 10 ON S2 None gt SAWIAO 11 ON S2 None gt SAWIAO 12 ON 54 Axia Audio TLS Corp InsertSource_la InsertSource_2 InsertSource_3 InsertSource_4 CR Monitor CR Headphn Preview Talk CR Guest H P WMIX 1 fader 2 VMI 1 fader 3 VMIX 1 fader 4 WMIX 1 fader 5 WMIX 1 Sub WMIX Main SAVIAD 1 PathFinderPC File Routers Scenes UserPanels Meter Bridge Toolbars View Window Help DA Router or User Group a TestNonTerm Woe Testi onTerm v Studio _1 Routes C Scenes Studio 2 Studio 3 Source 2 Studio 4 Studio_2 v InsertSource_1a InsertSource_2 Destination 6 InsertSource_3 AirChain_6 v InsertSource_4 Pgm 1 Lock gt Pgm 2 CR Monitor CR Headphn Clear Take Preview Talk CR Schedule Guest HP Find Resource Pom 4Rerd Current All 9 Router Routers as Search Channel28 Channel Channel2 Channel3 Channel4 Selecting List under the view menu will return the routing status to the original mode Multiple routers may be open and arranged in the maste
34. Down Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 97 Memory Slot The Memory Slot Action allows you to create and assign values to memory PathfinderPC Server has 1000 memory slots that are available for use by Stack Events and custom scripts Each memory slot consists of a slot name and a text value To assign a value to a memory slot fill in the Slot Name and Slot Value fields When the action is executed PathfinderPC Server will look through its memory slots for a slot with the name in the Memory Slot Name field If it finds one it will assign the value to that slot If 1t does not find a field with the specified name 1t will use the next available memory slot and assign that slot the name and value from the action If the Clear checkbox is selected PathfinderPC Server will look for a memory slot with the correct name and clear out both the name and value making it available to be reused Memory slots are also automatically synchronized between clustered servers so that on a failover the server that takes over the event system has the correct information in its memory slots Move Up Move Down Cut Copy Paste Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 98 Memory Matrix List The Memory Matrix Action allows you to create and assign values to memory matrixes PathfinderPC Server has 99 matrixes that are available for use by Stack Events and custom scrip
35. ES gt is not then it is False Loading a Profile on the specified Console will cause a stack event with Profile e this qualifier to be analyzed Negate will cause the qualifier to be True if any Profile other than the selected one is loaded Move Up Move Down Cut Copy Paste Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 85 VMIX Change This qualifier allows you to select a specific Axia Mix Engine and VMIX Channel on that Mix Engine in the Axia network Typically the field that will be most used for this qualifier is the State Field This allows you to select On or Off states for the Channel to trigger an Action If any of the No Change check boxes are unchecked then the corresponding fields must also match the state of the VMIX Channel in order for the qualifier to be considered True A Stack Event with a VMIX qualifier will be analyzed whenever the selected VMIX Channel State changes Negate will cause the qualifier to be True if any of the VMIX states are different from the ones selected in the qualifier This feature only available with a PRO license Name VMIXChange Negate a Mix Engine 172 16 1 53 PowerSt 001 053 gt VMIX Channel fis VMIX SUBH4 INH4 y gt Gain Y No Change 103 wl State O No Change On C Of Time Down Y No Change 103 E Time Up Y No Change 103 e Move Up Move Down Cut Copy Paste Software Authority Inc Axia Audi
36. For many users the medium log setting will be all they ever need The High setting should only be used for extreme debugging as it turns every log message in the system Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 119 on and will generate a tremendous amount of information and can also cause the server to respond slower in some high volume situations The high settings is not recommended and highly discouraged for a production server More detailed logging can be set up by manipulating the settings in the top part of the screen There are six logging sections each of which may be expanded to manipulate the log types that belong to each section Click on the plus sign to expand each section and make changes to the various log messages that the section of messages can generate loxi Log item Name i Group Type Edit Groups ConnectMessage Router Device Disconnect_PortClosedRemotely Router Device Disconnect_Timeout Router Device Disconnect_Normal Router Device ConnectAttempt Router Device ConnectSucceeded Router Device ConnectFailed ALL Router Device LoginFailure ALL Router Device RouterDeviceReceivedCommand None Router Device RouterEvents Various Router Device RouteChanged ALL Router Device DefinitionChanged None Router Device GPiChange ALL Router Device y Co Low Medium C High Custom Each section or log message type within the section can be set to None which means the event will no
37. IO basis If this field is blank the IO will repect the master silence and clipping thresholds as defined under the Preferences menu These additionalfields will only be present on the router types that can use them Axia GPIO Concepts It is important to understand some concepts about GPIO routing in Axia There are three routing states in which a GPIO port on an Axia network can be placed If we look at the web page for a GPIO node 2 ouT2 Ely 3 ouT3 172 16 1 51 1 EH 4 ouT4 8504 EH If the Channel field is blank then no routing is taking place for the port PathfinderPC Server can still monitor the port for closures and trip actions based on those closures It can also trigger the GPOs on this port to activate attached equipment And if the port is on a software driver it can also trip GPIs But the Axia network is not transferring closures across the network for this port Itis a standalone port Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 26 When the port carries an IP address with a slash and a port number this means that GPOs on this port are being slaved to the GPIs on the remote port at that IP address and port Therefore in the case above if a GPI on port 1 of the GPIO device at 172 16 1 51 is tripped low then the corresponding GPO on this port will go low In this way the port is like a snake It allows GPIs to be shown as GPOs on another port somewhere else on the network We will call this IP Port based GPIO routing
38. LAREN E EEA N E E E EENE E EAE EEE E E A E A 195 APIO E a A E A A A o a ed E AAN 196 COMPLETING THE CONFIGURATION a a a e o e a a a E eE E a e eo ea E Ea aoar ere 196 SERVICE MATE ld 197 TRROWTING 2 I Bet eet eRe et ee ek eee ae EEEE EE E et eke oa oe ee kd eke te eee 198 M ltiplexini ie nn Anna 199 PATAFINDERPR CONTRO D enoe trode anes E OE EE E EET O ES EOE tse E OESE OES ENE tee EEES ROET EONS 199 THIRD PARTY REMOTE CONTRO a 199 Remote Control Command LiSt u ccccccccccccccsssssececcccccssssececccceccusseccecccecsuuseccececeususesecceseseusuaesescecessuussescecesessuuuaecceccseusaaens 200 VISTA TU SERS ERE N EE a o a odia e ra o No 202 MULTICAST GPIO SERVICE tiicies ds cssdiscccictessactedeacdeaceasdvatecvactessdesssatodsaeteavaandsaiscateteadtzacaadeavatecadedcadee 202 DEMO LIMITATIONS AND LICENSING 0 cccsscccssssccesesecsececsseuseseuecsseeaesesausseeaeseseuseeeeaseusuesssoees 204 CONTACT INFORMATION csscsssesseesseesseeseeseeesneesneeseeseesaeesneeeneeseeseesaeesseessesseesseeseeeseesessess 204 APPENDIX A SOFTWARE AUTHORITY CONTROL PROTOCOL ccssssscssesecssseesesensssessenes 205 OVERVIEW ccccccccscsssssssscscsscseseseeesseeususeeueesusueesususususususuausususususuausuauaeauaesuauauauauauauseauaeauaeauaeauaeauauaeaeauauauauauauauauauauauauauauanauanaes 205 COMMAND LIST CLIENT TO PATHFINDERPC SERVERo ccccccccncncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonononononononnnnnnnononononnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnonononanan
39. LoginProgress Login Testina Complete Cancel lt lt Back Next gt gt Finish You may then click on the Route Names button on the main server page to edit the individual names of each router point in the system as described later in this document Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 24 The Utilities menu on this wizard offers a couple of other tools that are only useful in very specific cases The IP Address Helper is not longer recommended to be used but was originally designed as a bootp responder to assign ip addresses to Axia nodes The Manual Scan and Manual Scan range allow you to scan an IP or range of IPs for equipment This can be useful if you are setting up a Pathfinder System that is remote to the actual equipment and therefore cannot hear multicast data These menu items allow you define IP addresses and the system will then try to attach to equipment at those IP addresses and will add them into the system if it discovers and Axia device Editing Route Names and Custom IO Settings Once a router is created the Route Names button allows you to change the names of route points in the system This is primarily used for editing route names on routers that do not have route names embedded in the system For example the ZSystems detangler does not have names stored and available via its control protocol so we must assign the names Clicking on the RouteNames button will present a list of the names and the n
40. Major Remove Add Route Route Virtual Router Name Cancel Remove Add Edit Route Route Route Edit Route The Virtual Router Edit Window allows route points from other routers to be added removed edited and imported The Import Routes buttons provides a list of the current routers on the server and allows the user to import any or all of the routes from a given router into the virtual router The routes can either be appended to the Virtual Router or replace the existing routes on the router Import Routes Router Selection Screen Select the Router from which to Import Router Name TestNonTerm After selecting OK a selection list will appear Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 156 Use this ae 0 A select the Source Name Description HosIP_ HostName HostPon Jamaa routes you wish to Studio_2 2 Studio_2 ON DanLiw 172 16 1 201 DanLivewire 2 Studio_3 3 Studio_3 ON DanLiv 172 16 1 201 DanLivewire 3 import Use the InsertSource_1a 5 InsertSource_1a ON 172 16 1 201 DanLivewire 000 5 025 Cntrl and InsertS ource_3 t InsertSource_3 ON 172 16 1 201 DanLivewire 7 Shift keys InsertSource_4 8 InsertSource_4 ON 172 16 1 201 DanLivewire 8 to Pam 1 9 Pam 1 ON Livewire 172 16 1 60 Livewire 1 E AN PA lt a Par as highlight multiple Select All i ions to Impc Clear All rows n Destination Name _ Description HostIP_____ the
41. Namel lt NUM2 gt Name2 lt NUM3 gt Name3 End SourceNames lt RouterNumber gt Example gt gt sourcenames 1 Begin SourceNames 1 1 An_1 An_1 ON LivewireAnlg 172 16 1 201 LivewireAnlg 1 20101 239 192 78 133 2 An 2 An _20NLivewireAnlg 172 16 1 201 LivewireAnlg 2 20102 239 192 78 134 3 An 3 An _30N LivewireAnlg 172 16 1 201 LivewireAnlg 3 20103 239 192 78 135 4 An 4 An _4ON LivewireAnlg 172 16 1 201 LivewireAnlg 4 20104 239 192 78 136 5 An_5 An_5 ON LivewireAnlg 172 16 1 201 LivewireAnlg 5 20105 239 192 78 137 6 An_6 An_6ON LivewireAnlg 172 16 1 201 LivewireAnlg 6 20106 239 192 78 138 7 An_7 An_7ON LivewireAnlg 172 16 1 201 LivewireAnlg 7 20107 239 192 78 139 8 An_8 An_8ON LivewireAnlg 172 16 1 201 LivewireAnlg 8 20108 239 192 78 140 9 Pgml Pgm 1 ON Livewire 172 16 1 60 Livewire 1 6001 239 192 23 113 10 Pgm2 Pgm 2 ON Livewire 172 16 1 60 Livewire 2 6002 239 192 23 114 End SourceNames 1 gt gt StackDestTimerCount This command returns the number of active audio stack event timers on destinations It can be useful in debugging Example gt gt StackDestTimerCount StackDestTimerCount 3 gt gt StackEngine This command allows you to start stop and refresh the stack event engine This should be used with care Options are start stop refresh or refresh lt seconds gt The refresh option causes stack events to review the stack event files in the stack event folder for changes Example gt gt StackEngine refre
42. OK to return to the Event Group Screen Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 66 E DemoEventGroup StackingEventEditor Stacking Event Details Name GPIDemoEvert Description Enabled Vv Last Modified 12 18 2010 9 11 52 PM Delayed Actions if Met 0 Re evaluate qualifiers before executing delayed actions if met r Actions If Not Met 0 Milisecond delay 5 seconds P Delayed Actions if Not Met 0 Re evaluate qualifiers before executing delayed actions if not met O Move do Move Down Qt Copy Pate Move Down Cut Copy Paste Click on the event in the list and select the Evaluate Qualifiers on Startup if desired Click OK to add the event into the server ME PathFinderServer WIN E7B258SRVO8 1 0 DemoEventGroup Enabled The event should now be active and if you trigger the GPI the route change should be made and an email should be sent as long as the email server settings have been entered into PathfinderPC Servers master email settings Stack events can be simple triggers as described above or as complex and interlocked as you need them to be Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 67 Stack event logic the subtle nuances Stack event logic works by adding qualifiers and actions to an event If the logic drop down of the event is set to All then all of the qualifiers must be true in order for the Actions If Met to be run Otherwise the Acti
43. PathfinderPC Server at that city reports the closure and the central router picks that up and then sends messages to the other cities to trip their closures In this way a multi site GPIO network can be created and the only a single TCP port needs to be made available between the sites 9500 It is very important to understand that unlike the normal Axia Audio and GPIO routers in this case Pathfinder is actively involved in the data transfer of the closures If Pathfinder is shut down at any of the sites the closures will not transfer Therefore it is highly recommended that clusters are used for redundancy at the various sites if the closures in question are mission critical and you are using this style of router Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 30 So what is the difference between a Pathfinder Remote GPIO by Port and Pathfinder Remote GPIO by Pin router In the first case all 5 pins of a GPIO port are routed In the second it is actually possible to set up a pin by pin routing of GPIO pins rather than routing the entire 5 pin port In fact some customers have used this to create a router in a single city where they can route at the individual pin level Click Add PES Server ARE a ipti Minimum Pulse Length Finish The router creation will next ask PathFinderServer x Enter the address of the PFSServer site to add ox four questions It will ask for the IP address of t
44. Submixer 1 i VMIX Submixer 2 i VMIX Submixer 3 VMIX Submixer 4 i VMIX Submixer 5 i VMIX Submixer 6 VMIX Submixer 7 i VMIX Submixer 8 PFS Engine MM E E PFServer 172 16 1 242 At this point the green PFS should light up indicating a successful connection to PathfinderPro Server Now click Edit again and enter an Administrative username and password from the PathfinderPro server user database if prompted The edit window should now show additional options ul VMIX Control Version 1 04 E Engine 172 16 1 10 EA VMIX Submixer 1 VMIX Submixer 2 VMIX Submixer 3 VMIX Submixer 4 VMIX Submixer 5 VMIX Submixer 6 VMIX Submixer 7 X VMIX Submixer 8 athfinderPC Server Primary 172 16 1 242 Backup 127 0 0 1 Username Admin Password Admin i Router 1 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 8 D PFS Engine PFServer 172 16 1 242 Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 187 First click on the Engine field and enter the IP address of the Engine whose VMIX you wish to control Then uncheck any of the 8 VMIXers on this engine you wish to hide from the user You can also click on the plus sign and disable individual faders within a VMIXer Router Use the Router field to assign a number of a Pathfinder Router that you wish to use for source selection The router you select here must be a router number in PathfinderPro Server If you select the number of the main Axia router
45. This command starts a custom script This script must exist in the PFSScripts folder CallingControlName is optional but offers a way to pass the name of an object that should be identified as originating the script to the script CommandLineParameters is also optional and allows any additional information to be passed into the Script All remaining text on the command line after the command is placed into the command line parameter and is available to the script to use RunScript MyScript MySourceObject MyCommandLineText AndAlsoThisCommandLineText Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 210 Example gt gt RunScript CheckACRow Starting Script CheckACRow gt gt SetLock lt RouterNumber gt lt DestNumber gt lt TruelFalse gt Tries to change the lock status of a destination If successful a RouteStat command will be returned Example Lock Change Initiated gt gt RouteStat 1 1 2 True gt gt SetMemorySlot This command sets the value of a memory slot You can either send the name or the number of the memory slot followed by an equals sign and the value If the slot name exists the value will be changed If it does not the first available memory slot will be given that name and value The command sms is a valid alias for SetMemorySlot Example gt gt SetMemorySlot DansSlot Hello Everybody MemorySlot 2 DansSlot Hello Everybody gt gt ShowStackKeys This command is used for debugging purposes o
46. With a serial cable between the Prophet and PathfinderPC Server PathfinderPC can create the same functionality as a bank of ACU 1s In order to do this the Sine ACU 1 Prophet Version Protocol Translator requires an extra configuration screen which appears before the Protocol Translator Name assignment screen Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 113 iol x Select the Element This Translator will Control Control aerial elec Engine PowerSt 001 053 v Default Silence Time 30 v Seconds Use Software Authority Bridge GPI Hold Time ms y VMX VSubMix 1 ACU 1 VSubMix 2 ACU 2 VSubMix 3 ACU 3 VSubMix 4 ACU 4 VSubMix 5 ACU 5 VSubMix 6 ACU 6 VSubMix 7 ACU 7 AA IS Gee eH ee E Cancel lt lt Back Next gt gt Finish The Sine Systems ACU 1 protocol translator requires an Axia Mix Engine to do the mixing Select the Control and Audio Engine which will usually be the same The only reason there are two fields for Control and Engine was for legacy users before the control of VMIX was moved from the Element power supply to the Mix Engine These fields should both be set to the Mix Engine The VMIX sub mixers will be shown in the expandable tree below Silence detection commands for the various channels will also be passed through to the controlling device based on the timeout value entered Expanding the trees in the bottom half of the window will supply the interface for ass
47. all sources on the network will be available to the user to assign to VMIX faders If you wish to limit this list create a virtual router in PathfinderPC Server with only the sources you want the user to see Then assign the router ID number of the virtual router in this configuration screen Once you have completed the configuration changes click Apply again to store the changes At this point you should get a green light under the Engine label as well Finally click on some of the VMIX links on the left hand side of the program or restart the program to begin using the application a VMIX Control Version 1 04 lS Engine 172 16 1 60 VMIX Submixer 1 VMIX Submixer 2 VMIX Submixer 3 VMIX Submixer 4 VMIX Submixer 5 VMIX Submixer 6 VMIX Submixer 7 VMIX Submixer 8 PFS Engine PFServer 172 16 1 242 Using VMIX Control Each Axia Mix engine has a 40 channel virtual mixer in addition to the mixing resources for the Element console The 40 channel virtual mixer is divided into 8 five channel submixers Clicking on each submixer in the left side of the control panel will cause the 6 faders 5 channels plus a submix master to display on the right hand side O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 188 E Engine 172 16 1 60 MIX Submixer 1 em VIX Su bmixe VMIX Submixer 3 _ VMIX Submixer 4 MIX Submixer 5 lt MIX Submixer 6 i VMIX Submixer 7 MIX Submixer 8 PFS Engine PFServer 172 16 1
48. and 4 would not get changed from their current state and 5 would be set to high Example gt gt TriggerAllDestGPI 2 3 Ixxxx 500 gt gt GPOStat 2 3 Ihhhh gt gt GPOStat 2 3 hhhhh TriggerAllDestGPO lt RouterNumber gt lt SourceNumber gt lt State Illlllhhhhhllhhxxx gt lt PulseDuration in Milliseconds gt Trigger GPO contact closures on a GPIO Router or virtual router with GPO mappings Given a source it will trip the closure on all destinations the source is routed to Duration is optional and will cause a pulse in milliseconds rather than a steady state change The State is a list of the pins to set to high or low on the port Any pins with are set to high and any pins with h are set to low Pins with x are unaltered Therefore llxxh would set pins 1 and 2 to low 3 and 4 would not get changed from their current state and 5 would be set to high Example gt gt TriggerAllDestGPO 2 3 Ixxxx 500 gt gt GPOStat 2 3 Ihhhh gt gt GPOStat 2 3 hhhhh TriggerGPI lt RouterNumber gt lt DestinationNumber gt lt State llllllihhhhhllhhxxx gt lt PulseDuration in Milliseconds gt Trigger a GPI contact closure on a GPIO Router or Virtual router with GPI mappings It is important to know that in the Axia GPIO Router only windows driver GPI points can be triggered While hardware GPO points can be triggered with the next command shown below GPIs cannot Duration is optional and will cause a pulse in milliseconds rather
49. and parenthesis which enclose the arguments for the function For example funct add 1 2 will return 3 as its value into the stack event property field Functions can also be nested so we could write funct add 1 funct MemorySlotValue SourceHolder The nested function above would add 1 to whatever value is in the Memory Slot names SourceHolder Functions are really verging into the realm of scripting and so should be used with care and proper testing procedures before deployment However they also can be very useful For example we could use the nested function above to iterate through a series of sources Not all stack event property fields can use functions Those that can are signified with the function button next to that field Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 76 Below is a list of all of the functions that are available funct RouterName lt RouterNum gt Returns the name of a specific Router when given the number funct SourceName lt RouterNum gt lt SourceNumber gt Returns the name of a specific Source funct DestName lt RouterNum gt lt SourceNumber gt Returns the name of a specific Destination funct SourceDescript lt RouterNum gt lt SourceNumber gt Returns the description of a Source funct DestDescript lt RouterNum gt lt DestNumber gt Returns the description of a Destination funct SourceRoutedTo lt RouterNum gt lt DestNumber gt Returns the
50. as an alias The command will return the number of the memory slot that was deleted or an error if the slot name or number does not exist Example gt gt DeleteMemorySlot DansSlot MemorySlot 2 gt gt DestNames lt RouterNumber gt Returns Names of all Destination Points on a Router Minimally the command will return the Number of the point in the router and the name There may be additional tab delineated fields after the name depending on the type of router For example Axia audio routers will also return a description field host ip field hostname and Host IO number There will be a space between the number and the first field All fields after the first field are tab delineated Begin DestNames lt RouterNumber gt lt NUMI gt Namel lt NUM2 gt Name2 lt NUM3 gt Name3 End DestNames lt RouterNumber gt Example gt gt destnames 1 Begin DestNames 1 1 0 DU un Destination_ 1 Destination_2 Destination_3 Destination_4 Desitnation_5 Destination_6 Destination_7 Destination_1 ON LivewireAnlg Destination_2 ON LivewireAnlg Destination_3 ON LivewireAnlg Destination_4 ON LivewireAnlg Desitnation_5 ON LivewireAnlg Destination_6 ON LivewireAnlg Destination_7 ON LivewireAnlg 172 16 1 201 172 16 1 201 172 16 1 201 172 16 1 201 172 16 1 201 172 16 1 201 172 16 1 201 Destination 8 Destination 8 ON LivewireAnlg 172 16 1 201 O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp LivewireAnlg
51. assigned to the clock ForeColor Defines the Foreground color of the clock for the numbers if displayed FaceVisible Defines whether the face circle and has marks are visible You may choose to use a background image of your own design for the clock instead of the drawn face Digital If True the clock will display digital time instead of an analog face 24 Hour If the clock is in digital mode this defines if the time will be in military 24 hour mode Background Picture Defines a background picture for the clock O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 181 Stretch Image Determines if a background image for the clock should be centered or stretched to fill the clock space Font Name Font to be used for numbers Font Size Font Size to be used for the numbers Font Bold Whether the font is bold Font Underline Whether the font is underlined Font Italic Whether the font is italic Long Hash Color The color of the longer hash marks at the 5 minute intervals on the analog clock face Short Hash Color The color of the shorter hash marks at the minute intervals on the analog clock face Face Border Color The Color of the main clock face circle Time Offset The amount of time the clock should be offset from the computer s time if desired Face Numbers If True the numbers 1 through 12 will be displayed on the analog clock face Use the font setting
52. begins handling the On Off state of the button automatically Pressing the button once will turn it on and a second time will turn it off This allows latching buttons to be made quickly and easily Then actions can be executed based on the On or Off state of the button If the button is set for latching you will usually use the State rather than the Key State as the primary qualifier property Negate reverses the qualifier state making the qualifier False 1f all of the various fields conditions are met and True if they are not analyzed any time one of those pieces of information changes O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 80 Time Date Range The Time and Date Range qualifier allows you to make a qualifier based on a certain time This allows you to create a start Time and Date and an End Time and Date If the time is currently between these times the qualifier is True Otherwise it is False You can specify a specific date or a day of the week for the start and end dates depending on whether the event only happens once or recurs on a weekly schedule The qualifier will be analyzed whenever the start time date or end time date is crossed In addition this qualifier is often married to a second qualifier For example you could create a stack event with a GPI qualifier and a Time Date Range qualifier This would mean that when the GPI happens and it falls in the certain time range PathfinerPC Ser
53. clustering communications for example i 172 16 10 1 Netmask 255 255 255 0 ii 172 16 10 2 Netmask 255 255 255 0 d Assign final NIC card in each server a private IP address in a different network block for redundant crossover clustering communications for example i 172 16 11 1 Netmask 255 255 255 0 ii 172 16 11 2 Netmask 255 255 255 0 3 Connect the business NIC card to the Business network and the Axia NIC card to the Axia network in each computer 4 Use an Ethernet crossover cable to cross connect the remaining NIC cards between the two PathfinderPC servers Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 142 5 Use ping tests to make sure the Servers can access the Business network Axia network and each other v a the crossover IP addresses and the Axia IP address 6 Install PathfinderPC Server on Server A 7 Completely set up PathfinderPC Server and create the routers on Server A 8 When you are happy with the PathfinderPC Server setup on ServerA click on the clustering tab and edit the settings for the ServerA a Remove and re add the clustering NIC IP addresses for this server in the preferred order i Cross Over NIC 1 ii Cross Over NIC 2 iii Axia Network NIC b Remove and re add the client communication NICs as desired i Business NIC address ii Axia NIC address 9 Click OK 10 On Server A Click Add Host a Enter the host name for ServerB b Enter the IP addresses for the Cross over NICs of and A
54. consoles are the first and only IPAudio consoles with a pre Software Authority Inc configured network switch built in to save broadcasters the effort and expense of procuring and programming third party switches Our compact xNode AoIP interfaces feature one button setup and can run on mains power or Power over Ethernet PoE for flexibility and redundancy We ve even developed our own zero configuration Ethernet switch for Livewire xSwitch to make deploying IP Audio easier than ever More than 45 Livewire partners believe in the vision of the Connected Studio too Collectively they make dozens of hardware and software products ranging from telephone systems to audio processors to program automation that interoperate directly with Axia networks via Ethernet making the connections smart and eliminating the need to purchase audio conversion devices We ve also partnered with the high performance audio standard RAVENNA to expand broadcasters networking options even further And there are a lot more great new ideas in the cooker so watch this space In the final analysis Axia s success isn t due to our efforts It s you the broadcast professional who has embraced our vision used our technology in ways we never dreamed of and raved about Axia products to everyone who d listen We owe you a huge debt of thanks And we promise to never stop trying to amaze and delight you So here s to
55. e Shut down the PathfinderServer application on the primary server and let services roll to the backup system e On the Primary server from the Windows Control Panel choose Add Remove programs and double click PathfinderServer to start the uninstallation process On the primary server Complete the uninstall On the primary server Launch the installer for the new version Once complete shut down PathfinderServer on the secondary servers brief outage here Immediately start PathfinderServer on the Primary server Test to make sure everything is working ok If there is a problem you can shut down the primary server software and start up the secondary again e Once it has been confirmed that everything is working properly on the new version on the primary server with the secondary server software shut down use the control panel on the secondary server to uninstall the software on the secondary server O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 18 e Launch the installer for the new version on the secondary server e Once complete start the secondary server PathfinderPC Server software and watch to make sure synchronization completes successfully Main PathfinderPC Server Control Panel Overview ME PathFinderServer WIN E7B2585RVO8 E loj x File View Preferences Help 2 DanGPIO 3 DanVirtual This panel provides access to all of the configuration menus and wizards necessary to design and configure the PathfinderPC Rout
56. each command will present rows of data separated by CRLF The command return will always start with a line that says BeginList and a recap of the ListType and Arguments followed by a space and a version number BeginList SourceNames 1 2007 07 14_14 26 07_001 The version number is the date and time followed by a three digit number in the format yyyy mm dd_hh mm ss_xxx It will end with a line that says EndList Columns will be separated by tabs The first row after the BeginList line will always carry column names Each row s first column will be an availability column which will define whether the row s resources are available for use and if not why This column will use the following key 0 Available 1 User Locked 2 System Locked 3 Disabled Stream 4 Host Device is offline 5 Service Not Running The availability column is important because the application will usually want to skip and not display resources that are not available But in some cases you will want to display all resources regardless of whether they are available For example Engine Destination routing may not be changed by PFS So a route change action should not display these destinations as available for Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 220 making a route change action However you may want to make a qualifier that executes some action 1f the Engine itself changes the route assigned to one of its destinations So the qualifier se
57. fader Select a new source by double clicking on it or selecting the source and clicking Take Click Cancel to exit this screen without making any changes to the fader Please note that you cannot change the source assignment of a Turning a fader on or off and Fade Times To turn a fader on or off simply click the large On Off button at the bottom of the fader It is important to understand that the fade out or fade in time when turning a fader on or O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 189 off is based on the fade up or down time This means that if there is a fade time for the fader shown underneath the source assignment label the audio will fade to the current fader s position over that period of time when being turned on And it will be faded out over the fade out time when being turned off This fade time only affects turning a fader on or off and not any real time mixing functions This allows a softer and more graceful fade in and out when a fader is turned on or off If you want an instant on set the fade times to 0 You can modify the fade times by clicking on the fade up or down label on each fader and changing the value This will change the fade time for that VMIX channel inside the Axia Mix Engine UA Additionally you cannot turn a master fader on or off This is not an available option inside the Axia mix engine at this point in time Controlling the Fader The simplest way to control a fader is
58. formatting does not match we will be willing to make duplicate functions to create the list rather than shoe horning the existing one into supporting the new format as well or redeveloping the format across the application as that is likely to break more than it will fix Usage Notes In order to reduce server load and make the client application able to appear more responsive when large lists are involved each call to GetList will also return a Version number based on date time and a number The return from GetList should then be cached by the calling application along with the version number so that it may be used repeatedly without re downloading the list The calling O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 219 application can check if the list has changed by using the GetListVersion call which will return only the version of the specific List in question If the version has not changed from what is in the client application s cache then the client already has up to date information Some commands may also list aliases for the list types These aliases may be used in place of the full list type argument Key 1 In this document CRLF means a carriage return followed by a linefeed 2 All commands need to be terminated with a CRLF 3 All lines in returned commands will be terminated with CRLF Syntax GetList lt ListType gt lt Arguments gt Examples 1 GetList Routers 2 GetList SourceNames 1 The return from
59. gi IF pease Note Some care should be taken in choosing the time value In a radio station environment consider the maximum amount of dead air that a host might naturally have in the middle of a conversation If a GPIO router also exists in the PathfinderPC system you can also select a GPIO port and pin to activate This allows you to set up a light or other GPIO alert to trigger in the event of silence detection If you select the When Primary Fails Only option the GPIO will only get tripped when the primary route exists and silence is detected If you select the For all silence detect events the GPIO will get tripped when switching from primary to backup backup to primary or either state to failed Finally click Next and add a name and description for the event Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 51 Add a name and description for the event You can also add an alert email address with the same logic selections as the GPIO trigger above This will send an email to the address in the Alert Email address box Emails will only be sent 1f the Email server information is entered into the system using the Email Alert Settings menu item under the PathfinderPC Server File menu Click Finish to add the event Select a Name and Description for this Event EventName Description Alert Email Address When primary fails only Forall silence detect events Next gt
60. gt SAVIAO 3 ON SAVIAO af None O saviao 4 None gt SAWIAO 4 ON SAVIAO af None O saviaos None gt SAWIAO 5 ON SAVIAO Find Resource O saviao 6 None gt SAVIAO 6 ON SAVIAO Current All O saviao 7 None gt SAVIAO 7 ON SAVIAO de FMS O saviaos None gt SAVIAO 8 ON SAVIAO O saviaog None gt SAVIAO 9 ON SAVIAO SER O saviao10 None gt SAVIAO 10 ON SAVIAO O saviao 11 None gt SAVIAO 11 ON SAVIAO Events a SAVILO 12 None gt SAWIAO 12 ON SAVIAO swo DI ERRE sr raid Studio_1 ON DanLivewire gt AirChain_7 ON D SAVIAO 1 ON SAVIAO gt AirChain_8 ON Danl Studio_3 ON DanLivewire gt SAWIAO 1 ONS None gt SAVIAO 2 ON SAVIAO oon 006024 UNR 000000000001 a j alo gt PathfinderPC has two control panel toolbars Along the bottom is the window preset toolbar Each numerical button holds a window configuration Since the user can have multiple router and meter windows open simultaneously this panel can be used to store these window positions and sizes for quick retrieval Clicking on one of the numerical buttons retrieves the window position and opens the correct windows positioning them correctly In order to store a set of window positions click the green arrow button and then the preset number into which you wish to store the current window setup The route control toolbar is on the left side of the PathfinderPC screen This provides the primary routing control
61. hardware map GPIO Circuit When the HWMapType is GPIO this selects the GPIO circuit on the GPIO port above that will be used in the software to hardware map This GPIO port and circuit then acts like the software button The GPO will be closed when the button state is On and closing the GPI will do the same function as pressing the software button Once the GPIO Port and GPIO Circuit properties are both entered the HWMapAxiaSysName will automatically be filled in accordingly UserPanel Module Defines the Panel ID within the Element Console to address This number can be determined by telnetting to the IP address of the element CPU on Port 4010 and tapping several of the buttons For Example Open a command prompt on the windows PC and type Telnet IPAddress 4010 Telnet 172 168 2 3 4010 Press Enter This should open a Telnet session with the CPU Now tap several of the user panel buttons You should see messages that look like EVENT MOD_USER 3 BUT 6 KEY DOWN EVENT MOD_USER 3 BUT 6 KEY UP The Module number is the one after the first sign In this case 3 So 3 would be the number to enter in the UserPanel Module field UserPanel Button Identifies the number of the button on the panel to map to the software control The bottom button is 1 and they count up to the top of the panel Thus on a ten button panel the top button is ten Once the UserPanel Module and UserPanel Button properties are both entered t
62. how to write in a programming language For each stacking event the Administrator defines a list of qualifiers conditions and a list of Actions If all of the qualifiers are met all of the actions are run This section of the document will describe the various Qualifiers and Actions available and how to use them It will also provide some useful examples It will take you through the concepts of creating a stack event and then present a detailed description of the various qualifiers and actions available Stack Event Example 1 GPI triggered route with Email ME PathFinderServer WIN E7B2585RVO8 ol xf To begin creating a stacking event select the stacking a aS a is Ee n Default Enabled event tab within PathfinderPC Server Click the Add Stack Group button Stack Events are organized into Stack Event Groups These groups have nothing to do with the actual operation of the stack events but rather are organizational tools to make browsing the events easier The Stack Event group can be thought of as a folder similar to a folder in windows Each stack event group is written to its own xml file within the PFSStackEvents folder in the PathfinderPC Server installation folder All of the events that are in the particular group are written into that group s xml file This is important to know because if you create an event that you suspect is having undesired results rather than deleting the event using
63. in stack events in the form PanelName ControlName Caption Sets the textual information to be displayed in the label Height Displays the height of the control Change this parameter by right clicking on the control and resizing it or manually editing this property value Width Displays the width of the control Change this parameter by right clicking on the control and resizing it or manually editing this property value Top Displays the position of the top edge of the control on the panel Change this parameter by right clicking on the control dragging it to a new location or manually editing this property value Left Displays the position of the left edge of the control on the panel Change this parameter by right clicking on the control dragging it to a new location or manually editing this property value BackcolorOff The background color of the label when it is in the off state BackcolorOn Defines the background color of the label when it is in the on state ForeColor Defines the color of the text within the label This will display in the software user panels but the Axia Hardware User Panels only have the ability to change the background color and not the text color State Sets the state of the control On or Off The BackcolorOn and Off will follow this state change Flash Will turn flashing on or off Flashing will cause the background color to switch back and forth between the BackgroundOn color and the BackgroundOff color HwMa
64. is listed this command returns Status of all the points Return Command is formatted as follows RouteStat lt DestinationNumber gt lt SourceNumber gt lt LockCondition gt Usage Syntax RouteStat Or RouteStat lt DestinationNumber gt gt gt RouteStat RouteStat 1 3 False RouteStat 2 O False RouteStat 3 1 False RouteStat 4 O False gt gt PortState returns the state of each port in the system gt gt PortState Displays the Port Type and State for a port or all ports If No Specific Port Number is listed this command returns the Port Type and State of all Ports Return Command is formatted as follows O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 200 PortState lt PortNumber gt lt PortType gt lt CurrentState gt Or PortState lt PortNumber gt lt PortType gt lt CurrentState gt lt Tab gt lt CurrentSettings gt Usage Syntax PortState Or PortState lt PortNumber gt gt gt PortState PortState 1 TCPServer Listening O Clients Connected 7000 PortState 2 TCPServer Listening O Clients Connected 9002 PortState 3 TCPClient Connected 172 16 1 242 8000 PortState 4 Serial Open Com4 9600 N 8 1 gt gt PortName returns the name and description of each port in the system gt gt PortName Displays the Port Name and Description for a port or all ports If No Specific Port Number is listed this command returns the Port Name and Description of all Ports Return Command is
65. just to click on the slider and drag it to a new position As you drag the fader the Level label will also display the precise level In addition if you are using a mouse with a wheel you can position the mouse over the slider of a fader and use the wheel to move the fader up and down Double clicking the slider will force it to unity gain 0 Finally you can also click on the Level label and enter a precise value for the fader Metering All of the meters in VMIXControl are peak reading and are based on control information returned from the mix engine VMIX channel metering is pre fader but all master fader metering is post fader O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 190 SAPortRouter Overview SAPortRouter is an application that runs as a service on a computer It is designed to act as a router of textual data between serial ports and TCP ports In many ways it is designed to be a software based version of a hardware serial port router except that it can also route data to and from TCP ports as well This provides a very powerful tool for transferring legacy serial data around a network This program runs as a service on a computer and can be set to start up automatically at startup It also includes a configuration application that allows the service to be configured using a simple intuitive drag and drop interface Finally the service has a control port where third party controllers or PathfinderPC Server itself can con
66. ll e a a ll AL y O 135 CLUSTERING A da abi 137 CLUSTER COMPUTER DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS ccsssccessescececsecceceesaececsecaececueeecseaaececseceececseeeeceesaececseaeesesaeeesseaeessneaaeenees 137 CREATINGA CLUSTER os ithee tied ans wielded alien die ahh ile added eh aed e arera eRe phlei oh 138 NOTES OF IMPORTANCE E E R e cock ees ete hi ened ee eed ok e E 143 PATHEINDERPG iia dci 145 PATHEINDERPC INSTALLATION id bass 145 PATHFINDERPC MAIN APPLICATION da 146 ATA A A A E E 150 Me a de ar e a ok ER S 151 EAS A SVG a inate ait cobatGo de ened sod swum acne tee Seen states 154 AAN AAA A RN 155 S COTCIE FUNCTIONS A RA A A AA alce 160 YALAANI E EE tt it eii abies EE 161 PUL CMI QIU aa aora atada 162 Routers A1 cscs ccisdciesecscdes bie sevesececctivtinceGesececcesv casevssececdeactcocsTesesecces ck casebssececsdactceceVesececcedcbcescessececdsactcocsVesececcedctcesdossece 163 IS COMES IV CHUA sisi add 164 UJ SOP PANE LSM EIU e258 5 E ON 164 Meter Bridge Mentir oie htt A eee tases ike Bes Riv E ead ee ede EE A ie Reet A ie eae 164 Toolbars Meninas dE dadas 164 NA A O O hae da San wea O A 165 AAA E 165 Help Men A A A a 165 PATHFINDERPC CLIENT REGISTRY SETTINGS cc cccesssscecssseeceessececsesaececseneeceeaececseaaececseeeecessaeeecsesaeeecseseeesssaeeecseaaeeesseeseenses 166 PANEL DESIGNER iii rra 168 CREATING A PANEL a E a a ces acnece Shaaet sguseneonl gees er Shae Re eee 168 Arranging controls ON the Jorissen oiie S dl Divi eos ab
67. main PathfinderPC Server window and select the Routers Tab Find the number of the router that has the source and destination to be used Enter this number into the MapRouter property Then select that router in the list and click on the Route Names button This will list all of the sources and destinations in the router Find the numbers of the source and destination to be activated as a route when the button is pushed and enter those numbers into the MapSource and MapDestination properties Remember that pushing the button from within the Panel Designer will do nothing as it is just the designer program The panel must first be saved into the correct folder on the server and then the panel should be opened using either PathfinderPC Client or PathfinderPC Mini So assuming that our Audio Router is router 1 and our button is going to route Source 1 to Destination 1 make MapRouter MapSource and MapDestination all 1 Before we try to use this new panel add one more button Create a caption and name for this button as well and set MapRouter and MapDestination also to 1 or whatever number router your audio router 1s but set the Source to 2 This will mean that when we run the panel clicking the top button will route 1 to 1 and clicking the second button will route 2 to 1 Furthermore the Mapping process will automatically change the state of either button 1f the route for that button is active so that it will toggle the backcolor colors Now save the Pa
68. more information gt gt RouterNames Display Names of all routers on the System Usage Syntax RouterNames gt gt ActivateRoute lt RouterNumber gt lt DestNumber gt lt SourceNumber gt Tries to initiate a route change If the change is successful a RouteStat command will be returned Example gt gt ActivateRoute 1 1 2 Route Change Initiated gt gt RouteStat 1 1 2 False gt gt ActivateScene lt RouterNumber gt lt SnapShotName gt See ActivateSnap This is just an alias for that command ActivateSnap lt RouterNumber gt lt SnapShotName gt Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 205 This command activates a snapshot also called a scene change on a specific router The command returns that a snapshot has been initiated Any routes that change as a result of the snapshot will get printed out as RouteStat responses This may include route change commands from cirtual routers that are built on the base router on which the scene change is being activated Example gt gt activatesnap Clearl And2 Snapshot Initiated gt gt RouteStat 3 1 O False gt gt RouteStat 4 1 0 False gt gt RouteStat 9 1 0 False gt gt RouteStat 1 1 0 False gt gt RouteStat 3 2 O False gt gt RouteStat 4 2 O False gt gt RouteStat 9 2 O False gt gt RouteStat 1 2 O False gt gt DeleteMemorySlot This command deletes a memory slot and its data by either name or number The command dms can be used
69. relays GPOs which can be tripped for each ACU 1 Finally there is a bank of 16 Optos GPIs that can be wired up for any of the Input Channels The Optos for any Channel that is turned on are then passed through to the controlling device Each Prophet can address up to 4 ACU 1s on a single serial port since the serial cables can be chained So how is this functionality mimicked in the Axia world Each Axia Element has a 40 Channel Virtual Mixer that can be accessed through its web page These 40 Channels are split up into 8 sub mixers with 5 Channels each There is an output from each of the 8 sub mixers as well as a main mix out Thus the ACU 1 Protocol Translator makes each of the VMIX sub mixers on an Element equivalent to a single ACU 1 Prophet can address all of the VMIXers on a single Element through a single serial cable connection to PathfinderPC Server Please note at this point in time Prophet has a limit of 4 ACUs per serial connection so only the first 4 VMIXers on any Element are actually addressable by Prophet Since the Axia VMIX sub mixers are 5 channel rather than 8 only the first 5 channels in any ACU setup in Prophet should be used In addition you can assign 1 GPO port 5 closures on the Axia network to each VMIX ACU Finally you can assign up to 3 GPI ports on the Axia network 15 closures to each VMIX Channel These closures will then be passed through as Optos to Prophet just as if they were ACU closures if the VMIX Channel is on
70. run if you start the server and the closure already exists because presumably the event has already taken place and executing it again would restart the CD In this case you would leave this option off and the system would note the current state of the qualifiers and wait for them to change their collaborative True False state again before executing any actions On the other hand if this option is turned on then actions would get run as soon as the system retrieves the state of the qualifiers So if you want to make sure a button is lit properly based on the current route state this option should be on In most cases this option should be turned on If an event does not seem to work properly until its state is toggled this option probably has been forgotten and needs to be turned on MORE EXAMPLES Let s expand our GPIO example above Example 2 Time Date Select the event in the main PathfinderPC Server window and click edit This will open the Stack Event Group List window Now select the one stack event we have in this group at this time and click edit again You should now see your stack event with one qualifier and two actions Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 68 Let s add another qualifier Click add and select qualifiers to open the list or qualifier possibilities Double click the Time Date range qualifier to add it to the qualifiers list and open its properties in the editor io Name GPIDemoEvent Other
71. systems in the cluster must also either be 32 bit or 64 bit Mixing a 32bit and 64 bit operating system in a cluster will cause problems with the data synchronization Cluster Computer Design considerations In most cases we recommend installing either 3 or 4 NIC cards into computers that will be used in a PathfinderPC Server Cluster 1 NIC card in each of the PathfinderPC Servers will be connected to the Axia network 2 NIC cards will be cross connected with crossover wires for clustering communications And the fourth NIC card can be connected to the business LAN if desired for PathfinderPC Clients that need to control routing without allowing those PCs direct access to the Axia network Standard computer networking dictates that each NIC card must be in its own subnet so that the computer knows which card to use when trying to reach any specific address A default Gateway should only be configured on the NIC card that is connected to a network that has a gateway usually the business network Axia Network Business Network Pathfinder Server A a Pathfinder Server B Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 137 While both servers are continuously connected to and monitoring all of the Axia devices in the PathfinderPC databases only one server at any point in time will have it s event system running This is so that you will not have events executed twice This role falls to the active machine in the cluster with the lowest clu
72. than a steady state change The State is a list of the pins to set to high or low on the port Any pins with are set to high and any pins with h are set to low Pins with x are unaltered Therefore llxxh would set pins 1 and 2 to low 3 and 4 would not get changed from their current state and 5 would be set to high If the command is successful a GPIStat command will be returned Example gt gt TriggerGPI 2 3 Ixxxx 500 gt gt GPIStat 2 3 Ihhhh gt gt GPIStat 2 3 hhhhh O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 215 TriggerGPO lt RouterNumber gt lt DestinationNumber gt lt State llllllhhhhhllhhxxx gt lt PulseDuration in Milliseconds gt Trigger a GPO contact closure on a GPIO Router or Virtual router with GPO mappings Duration is optional and will cause a pulse in milliseconds rather than a steady state change The State is a list of the pins to set to high or low on the port Any pins with are set to high and any pins with h are set to low Pins with x are unaltered Therefore Ilxxh would set pins 1 and 2 to low 3 and 4 would not get changed from their current state and 3 would be set to high If the command is successful a GPOStat command will be returned Example gt gt TriggerGPO 2 3 Ixxxx 500 gt gt GPOStat 2 3 Ihhhh gt gt GPOStat 2 3 hhhhh Unsubscribe This command unsubscribes from the items listed in the subscribe command above Valid versions of the command are Subscribe Memory Su
73. the PFSScripts folder If your route database is very large it is sometimes better to copy the database files from the primary server to the secondary server manually before you first launch the secondary server This will reduce the time and effort needed for the very first initial synchronization Finally Clustering requires a license for each machine and the machines will not connect and synchronize properly if both machines have the same license Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 144 PathFinderPC PathfinderPC Client is the application that users will use to make routing changes with the PathfinderPC system It communicates with the PathfinderPC Server over TCP IP on the local LAN and or over the Internet It can be used to make routes create and edit virtual routers create edit and activate scene changes as well as schedule events It also has a search engine for finding route points and scenes throughout the entire routing system PathfinderPC Installation Once the server software is installed the client software may be installed on any Windows machine on the network that is to be used for making routing changes Run Setup tor ie PathFinderPC PathfinderPC Client to start the installation Welcome to the PathFinderPC Setup Wizard Click Next to begin the installation On the next eee The installer will quide you through the steps required to install PathFinderPC on your computer Click Next
74. the PathfinderPC Server Main Control Panel Use the buttons at the bottom of the screen to Add Delete or Edit users Each user can either be an Administrator or a General user Administrators have full privileges on the system for all routers If General User is selected the screen will expand to show the limitations available for general users ox User Name Admin Password Confirm Password Description Default Administrator Account Administrator C General User Commit Cancel Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 40 The Administrator who sets up user accounts may define which routers in the system a general user may access and whether they have the right to override lock conditions on route points In addition only Administrators not general users are allowed to create or modify virtual routers In as normal operating environment all routers will be set up on the system The Administrator will then log into PathfinderPC client and create virtual routers which contain only the route points that should be available to general users in specific rooms or for specific shows Finally the Administrator will create the accounts for these general users and only allow them to have access to these virtual routers ME Edit User 10 x This will limit the general user s ability to change critical routes in the system In orde
75. the PathfinderPC Server and Client software there will be drop down lists when sources and destinations need to be selected for events stack events etc Next to these drop down lists will also be a button identified by an ellipsis Clicking the ellipsis button will open a select window from which the source or destination may be selected as an alternative to finding the point in the drop down list This window includes a grid with additional information about the sources or destinations including Name Pathfinder Number Description Host IP Host Name Axia Channel Number etc The grid may be sorted by any of the columns and the columns may be resized and reordered Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 46 Pgm 2 ON PowerSt 001 053 Pam 4 Rerd ON PowerSt 001 053 Aux Send 1 ON PowerSt 001 053 Aux Send 2 ON PowerSt 001 053 CR Direct ON PowerSt 001 053 CR Monitor ON PowerSt 001 053 CR Headphn ON PowerSt 001 053 Preview ON PowerSt 001 053 Talk CR ON PowerSt 001 053 Guest H P ON PowerSt 001 053 Stu Monitr ON PowerSt 001 053 Talent H P ON PowerSt 001 053 Talkback ON PowerSt 001 053 Pam 3 ON PowerSt 001 053 Pam 4 ON PowerSt 001 053 Aux Send 3 ON PowerSt 001 053 Aux Send 4 ON PowerSt 001 053 WMIX 1 Sub ON PowerSt 001 053 WMIX 2 Sub ON PowerSt 001 053 WMIX 3 Sub ON PowerSt 001 053 172 16 1 53 172 16 1 53 172 16 1 53 172 16 1 53 172 16 1 53 172 16 1 53 172 16 1 53 172 16 1 53 172 16 1 53 17
76. the Stat command Command GetList SourceDetailsStat lt RouterNumber gt Example GetList SourceDetailsStat 1 Return Columns Availability ID Pathfinder ID Name The name of the source Description The description of the source Host IP The IP address of the host that serves the source Host Name The name of the host that serves the source Host Port The hosts s internal identifier for the source Axia Channel The Axia Livewire channel number of the source if applicable Axia Stream IP The Axia Livewire multicast stream address of the source if applicable If the router is an Axia GPIO router this column will contain the IPAddress with a slash and the host port 172 16 1 23 3 AES Lock Shows the AES Lock state Only AES sources will be reported by this command Example BeginList SourceDetailsStat 1 2011 01 25_09 19 26_001 Avail ID Name Description Host IP Host Name Host Port Axia Channel Axia Stream IP AES Lock 0 41 PSIO 07 PSIO 07 ON PSIO 001 055 172 16 1 55 PSIO 001 055 7 5507 239 192 21 131 AESSYNC ERR 0 42 PSIO 08 PSIO 08 ON PSIO 001 055 172 16 1 55 PSIO 001 055 8 5508 239 192 21 132 AESSYNC ERR 16 DestinationDetailsStat Returns Details about the Destinations in a Router which support the stat command Command GetList DestinationDetailsStat lt RouterNumber gt Example GetList DestinationDetailsStat 1 Return Columns Availability ID Pathfinder ID Name The name of the destination Description The desc
77. the server s user interface you can temporarily move the file out of the folder and restart the server application You can also disable the entire event group or the individual events within the group This will remove the stack event from the system during testing without deleting your work You can then move the file back at a later time or enable the event group again and the event will become active again It is also important to know that in a clustered environment the Stack Events must be edited on the server that currently owns the event system Furthermore while the changes to Stack Events are automatically synchronized between clustered servers the new events may not display in the Stack Event Window on the server that does not own the event system This is because this window is not updated until and unless the Event System engine starts up on that server as a result of a failover However if you browse into the stack events folder on the secondary server you will see that in fact the XML files have been updated through the cluster synchronization Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 54 The Stack Event Editor When you add a new Stack Event Group you will be presented with the following screen EN Default StackingEventEditor Stacking Events 1 Stacking Event Details Name Description Name Defaut Default Description Last Modified 12 18 2010 6 16 04 PM Qualifiers 1 Evaluate qual
78. when clipping is detected on a given LW channel Py Level Present MY Triggers when a specific level of audio is detected on a give A GPI State Change 3 Triggers from or makes a change to a GP Actions If Not Met 0 0 GPO State Change gt Triggers from or makes a change to a GPO User Panel Button Triggers from or makes a change to a user panel button Delayed Actions If Not Met 0 Delay 5 seconds _ ER T f if d dd riggers from a specific time and date or time and date range m n a l O 3 Move Up Move Down Cut Copy Paste ma gt est Remove i There is a very powerful list of qualifiers and actions that can be used with the system to create virtually any kind of event imaginable The details for each qualifier and action and what they are use for appears later in this section Either double click the qualifier or action in the right hand side or drag it to the appropriate box If you double click it will add it to the qualifier or selected action box and then open the properties for that qualifier or action Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 58 immediately If you click and drag it will leave the qualifier or action list available for you to add more Then double clicking the qualifier or action in the appropriate list on the left after it has been added will open the property editor for that qualifier or action on the right If you are adding a single qualifier or
79. you first start PathfinderPC Server it creates a file called Cluster xml within the PathfinderPC Server folder The results of this file are displayed when you select the Clustering Tab in the PathfinderPC Server application Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 138 File View Preferences Help Routers Events Stacking Events Protocol Translator Cluster Hosts E JEN SAVIAO Local Listening DPF Clients Connected By Clustering Addresses oE 192 168 1 101 01721613 O Event System Running This picture shows the name of the machine on which PathfinderPC Server is running and the various NIC cards that are in the system By default all of these NIC cards are enabled for clustering communications Selecting the host name and clicking edit allows these settings to be fine tuned HostName SAVIAO IP Addresses to be used for Clustering Communications Address Port 192 168 1101 5300 172164 3 5300 IP Addresses to be used for Client Communications 192 168 1 101 5200 1721613 5200 Edit Remove Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 139 Using this screen you can define which NIC cards are to be used for clustering communications and the order in which they will be used You can also define which of the NIC cards can be used for copies of the PathfinderPC Mini or Client to communicate with the server Clicking Add Host from the main PathfinderPC Server screen
80. 00 End Of Message Initialization Command This port connects to a remote server at the specified IP address and TCP port Enter the correct configuration information for this port The End Of Message field allows you to enter a command which is expected at the end of each message for the protocol that the port will be using This allows the application to wait until it has a complete message before sending it on to other ports to which this port is routed This leads to more efficient transmission You can enter non typable characters by using plus a 2 digit ascii hex code So 0DPOQA is equivalent to a carriage return and line feed If you leave this blank data will be sent as soon as it is received which may be on a character by character basis The initialization command if present will be sent each time the port connects or opens Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 195 GPIOPort ES Axia GPIO Configuration ID 3 Name AxiaDriverGPIO Description TCP Address 127 0 0 1 GPIO GPIO Port 1 End Of Message Initialization Command LOGIN OD 0AADD GPIZ 0D Apply Cancel The Axia Windows Driver allows textual messages to be sent to it that applications can read if they know the protocol This allows messages to be sent to a specific Axia driver GPIO port Fill in the appropriate details for the correct Axia driver Please note this is only for communicating with an Axia Wind
81. 1 OuT2 OUT 2 ON Element 001 051 OUT 3 OUT 3 ON Element 001 051 OUT 4 OUT 4 ON Element 001 051 OUT 5 ON Element 001 051 Cancel OUT6 OUT 6 ON Element 001 051 OUT7 OUT 7 ON Element 001 051 OUTS OUT 8 ON Element 001 051 OOND A U NE un PS I0 GPO 1 PS IO GPO 1 ON PSIO 001 055 Finally if the controlling device will communicate directly with the PathfinderPC Server protocol translator using a serial port leave the Use Software Authority Bridge option unchecked If you are going to use the Software Authority ACU Bridge application to convert the serial communications to TCP and thereby enable communications to both servers in a cluster turn this option on See the section on Software Authority bridges for more information Finish adding the translator into the system and use the Prophet to test turning VMIX channels on and off O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 116 Logging One of the best keys to troubleshooting any advanced system is detailed log information And therefore a great deal of time and energy has been devoted to the PathfinderPC Server logging system PathfinderPC Server s logging system 1s accessed through the Preferences menu View Preferences Help Roul Silence Threshold ID Ne Clipping Threshold Axia Automatic SRC DST Additions Log Settings v Log To File Log To TCP Port 5400 Log To UDP SysLog Remember Memory Slots between Restarts There are three places to which log data m
82. 2 16 1 53 172 16 1 53 172 16 1 53 172 16 1 53 172 16 1 53 172 16 1 53 172 16 1 53 172 16 1 53 172 16 1 53 172 16 1 53 172 16 1 53 PowerSt 001 053 PowerSt 001 053 PowerSt 001 053 PowerSt 001 053 PowerSt 001 053 PowerSt 001 053 PowerSt 001 053 PowerSt 001 053 PowerSt 001 053 PowerSt 001 053 PowerSt 001 053 PowerSt 001 053 PowerSt 001 053 PowerSt 001 053 PowerSt 001 053 PowerSt 001 053 PowerSt 001 053 PowerSt 001 053 PowerSt 001 053 PowerSt 001 053 ET tas STE EPT NETO ETT EA 239 192 20 182 239 192 20 185 239 192 20 186 239 192 20 187 239 192 20 190 239 192 20 191 239 192 20 192 239 192 20 193 239 192 20 194 239 192 20 195 239 192 20 196 239 192 20 197 239 192 20 198 239 192 20 183 239 192 20 184 239 192 20 188 239 192 20 189 239 192 21 26 239 192 21 32 239 192 21 38 Select Close Click the header bar with the column name for any column to sort the list by that column in ascending order Click the footer bar for the particular column to sort the list by that column in descending order Dragging a column header will allow you to reorder the columns Press the Close button to close the window Select the source or destination in the list that you want applied to the drop down list in the previous window Then click Select or double click the entry to select that entry and cause the select list to disappear This process may be alternatively used to select sources and destinati
83. 51 8 9 PSIOGPO1 PSIOGPO1ONPSIO 001 055 172 16 1 55 PSIO 001 055 1 172 16 1 55 1 10 PSIOGPO2 PSIOGPO20NPSIO 001 055 172 116 155 PSIO 001 055 2 172 16 1 55 2 11 PSIOGPO3 PSIOGPO30NPSIO 001055 17216 155 PSIO 001 055 3 172 16 1 55 3 12 PSIOGPO4 PSIOGPO4ONPSIO 001 055 17216 155 PSIO D01 055 4 172 16 1 55 4 13 NoName1 NoName1 ON LivelO 172 16 1 91 LivelO 1 172 16 1 91 1 14 NoName2 NoName2 ON LivelO 172 16 1 91 LivelO 2 172 16 1 91 2 15 NoName3 NoName3 ON LivelO 172 16 1 91 LivelO 3 172 16 1 91 3 16 NoName4 NoName4 ON LivelO 172 16 1 91 LivelO 4 172 16 1 91 4 17 NoName5S NoName5 ON LivelO 172 16 1 91 LivelO 5 172 16 1 91 5 18 NoName6 NoName6 ON LivelO 172 16 1 91 LivelO 6 172 16 1 91 6 19 NoName7 NoName7 ON LivelO 172 16 191 LivelO 7 172 16 1 91 7 20 NoName8 NoName8 ON LivelO 172 16 1 91 LivelO 8 172 16 1 91 8 21 Airl Host 01 Air1 Host 01 ON Air1 Host 172 16 1 227 Airl Host 1 172 16 1 227 1 22 hirl Host02 Air1 Host 02 ON Air1 Host 172 16 1 227 Airl Host 2 172 16 1 227 2 Airl Host 03 Airl Host 03 ON Air1 Host 172 16 1 227 Airl Host 3 172 16 1 227 3 24 Airl Host 04 Airl Host 04 ON Air1 Host 172 16 1 227 Airl Host 4 172 16 1 227 4 Airl Host 05 Air1 Host 05 ON Air1 Host 172 16 1 227 Airl Host 5 172 16 1 227 5 Airl Host 06 Airl Host 06 ON Air1 Host 172 16 1 227 Airl Host 6 16 1 227 6 of Name Type Description Name GPIStateChange Negate E Actions If Met 2 Router 2 DanGPIO 1 gt l aa Sa
84. Addresses 172161 4 O i Event System H Remove 3 You will notice the red X through the Server B This means that Server A has not been able to contact Server B yet You will also notice the local word on the top node indicating which computer is the local machine Finally you may notice that the Event system is disabled red x on both nodes After a period of time of waiting to establish a connection with the B Node the Server A will go ahead and start the Event System This is indicated by the removal of the red x through the Event System and the status will switch from Off to On Now we must go through the same procedure on the other server Once both servers have their own and the opposing server s information in their cluster file they will be able to connect to one another When this happens you will see the statuses on the machines oscillate through a number of states including converging and synchronizing data and they will eventually all settle on Connected and Listening for the local host Furthermore the Event System will be shown as running on the server with the lowest IP address and will be shown as pending with a yellow X through the event system on the other machine Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 141 EN PathFinderServer SAVIAO BAX Fie View Preferences Help Routers Y Evens J Stacking Events Protocol Translator Eiustering E Cluste
85. Audio router to the PathfinderPC System you should see all Axia devices that have audio resources and route points on the network in the lower window If you are adding a GPIO router you will see all GPIO devices and points You may also manually add and remove terminals by clicking Add and entering the IP Address of the Axia device or clicking on the device in the list and selecting Remove Manually adding a device by ip address will only work if the device is accessible and has resources Audio or GPIO that match the kind of router you are trying to create The Gpio Router setup screen may also have an additional button called Add MCast This button will only be present on Pathfinder Pro systems that have the Multicast Gpio service installed It allows the Administrator to add additional multicast gpio ports into the system See the section in this document on the multicast gpio service for more details Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 23 When you are finished adding all of the Livewire terminals click Next Please Note If you have not changed the password in any of the Axia devices you may skip this step In order for the server to control the Axia devices it must know the access password for each Livewire Terminal in the system Select any number of the Livewire terminals in the list so that the lines turn blue and click Set Password This is not changing the password in the
86. Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 129 Group Type Event Description A standard GPIO event is running ActivateRouteEvent ID 5018 Group Type Event Description An Activate Route event is running ActivateSceneEvent ID 5019 Group Type Event Description An Activate Scene event is running UserPanelPropertyChanged ID 5020 Group Type None Description A user panel property has changed RunScript ID 5021 Group Type Scripts Description A script is being run RunScriptCommand ID 5022 Group Type Scripts Description A single script type command is being run ScriptTimerTripped ID 5023 Group Type Scripts Description Script Timer completed count down ScriptTimerGetName ID 5024 Group Type Scripts Description Name of script timer requested ScriptTimerSetName ID 5025 Group Type Scripts Description Name of a script timer was set ScriptTimerGetInterval ID 5026 Group Type Scripts Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 130 Description The interval of a script timer was requested ScriptTimerSetInterval ID 5027 Group Type Scripts Description The interval of a script timer was set ScriptTimerGetEnabled ID 5028 Group Type Scripts Description Checked to see if a Script timer is enabled ScriptTimerSetEnabled ID 5029 Group Type Scripts Description Scrip
87. BOX 02 09 SHOBOX 02 09 Ol Return 1 Return 1 ON Powe Please Note Engine names may SHOBOX 02 10 SHOBOX 02 10 Ol Return 2 Return 2 ON Powe not be modified by Pathfinder so SHOBOX 02 11 SHOBOX 02 11 Ol CR Monitor CR Monitor ON Po SHOBOX 02 12 SHOBOX 02 12 Ol CR Headphonesn CR Headphonesn changes on these points will not SHOBOX 02 13 SHOBOX 02 13 Ol Studio Monitor Studio Monitor ON get published to the Engine SHOBOX 02 14 SHOBOX 02 14 Ol Source Preview Source Preview Ol SHOBOX 02 15 SHOBOX 02 15 Ol External Preview External Preview C SHOBOX 02 16 SHOBOX 02 16 Ol VMIX 1 in 1 VMIX 1 in 1 ON Por SHOBOX 02 17 SHOBOX 02 17 Ol VMIX 1 in 2 VMIX 1 in 2 ON Por Tf the router being edited is an SHOBOX 02 18 SHOBOX 02 18 Ol VMIX 1 in 3 VMIX 1 in 30N Por Axia Livewire router the Add SHOBOX 02 19 SHOBOX 02 19 Ol VMIX 1 in 4 VMIX 1 in 4 ON Por Edit and Remove buttons will also SHOBOX 02 20 SHOBOX 02 20 Ol VMIX 1 in 5 VMIX 1 in 5 ON Por SHOBOX 02 21 SHOBOX 02 21 Ol VMIX 2 in 1 VMIX 2 in 1 ON Pov appear SHOBOX 02 22 SHOBOX 02 22 Ol VMIX 2 in 2 VMIX 2 in 2 ON Por SHOBOX 02 23 SHOBOX 02 23 Ol VMIX 2 in 3 VMIX 2 in 3 ON Pov SHOBOX 02 24 VMIX 2 in 4 VMIX 2 in 4 ON PO y By pressing the Add Edit and Remove butt
88. Default Graphics Path or within the PanelGraphics folder within each PathfinderPC Client s or PathfinderPC Mini s installation folder You can view the changes to these properties in the designer Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 177 by assigning a picture and then pressing and releasing the button with the state property either on or off Picture_Down_On Defines a picture to be used in the button when the button is down and the State is On In order for pictures to be used they must be located either in the network share defined by the Panel Form s Default Graphics Path or within the PanelGraphics folder within each PathfinderPC Client s or PathfinderPC Mini s installation folder You can view the changes to these properties in the designer by assigning a picture and then pressing and releasing the button with the state property either on or off Picture_Down_Off Defines a picture to be used in the button when the button is down and the State is Off In order for pictures to be used they must be located either in the network share defined by the Panel Form s Default Graphics Path or within the PanelGraphics folder within each PathfinderPC Client s or PathfinderPC Mini s installation folder You can view the changes to these properties in the designer by assigning a picture and then pressing and releasing the button with the state property either on or off FlashPicture This prop
89. Description This log message is not used at this time GPOSubscription ID 4008 Group Type RouterDevice Description This log message is not used at this time LoginRequest ID 4009 Group Type RouterDevice Description A login request is being sent to a specified device CheckNames ID 4010 Group Type RouterDevice Description A request to get the names assigned to sources and destinations on a specific device is being sent RouteStatusRequest ID 4011 Group Type RouterDevice Description PathfinderPC Server is sending a request to get the current routing status of the specified device SendEmail ID 4012 Group Type None Description PathfinderPC Server is a sending an email The email address that 1t is sending to is included as part of the log data SendUserCommandToPT ID 4013 O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 126 Group Type Protocol Translator Description PathfinderPC Server is sending a user defined command message to a Protocol Translator port Software Authority Protocol and Generic Protocol only SendRouterStateChangeToPT ID 4014 Group Type Protocol Translator Description PathfinderPC Server is sending a route state change command to a Protocol Translator port Software Authority Protocol only SendProtocolTransCommand ID 4015 Group Type Protocol Translator Description PathfinderPC Server is sending a c
90. Details v Description Qualifiers 2 Logic fan y Qualifier Details Open Palette v wa ipti Name TimeRange cPistateChange GPIStateChange er ae Description FT Negate E Actions If Met 2 Start Date Selected Days Mon Tue Thu gt Route Route O SendEmail SendEmail Start Time 05 00 00 PM gt Delayed Actions If Met 0 Delay ls seconds 2 Boies ace oe gt Mon Tue Thu gt A End Time 03 00 00 Pm gt Actions If Not Met 0 Delayed Actions If Not Met 0 Delay 5 seconds _ Move Up Move Down Cut Copy Paste Add Edt Remove In this case we are adding a qualifier with specific days and times Monday Tuesday and Thursday between 5 PM and 9 PM Adding this qualifier into the event will mean that the route and email will only occur if the GPI button is pressed between the times 5 PM and 9 PM on specific days Click OK on the Stack List and again on the Stack Event Group List screens to write the stack event file and test your results In the example above you will notice that each qualifier has also had a checkbox that can be checked that says Negate This checkbox will effectively invert the meaning of the qualifier So for example if we had checked that box on the time range qualifier it would mean that the actions would be run if the GPI were pressed and it was any time of day other than Monday Tuesday or Thursday between 5 PM and 9 PM
91. EE EA S EE EE EA ES EES AEEA 16 BACKUPS ereen Ee aea EO E E AE EE E AE O A E REA ER A aE anea ATONE EAr at 17 PATHFINDERPC PRO SERVER VERSION UPGRADE s cssscecesseesseeceeeesneecenecesneecsucesencecsueeecacecsaeeeeneeceaeeeeaeecseeseneeceaeeeenaessaes 18 MAIN PATHFINDERPC SERVER CONTROL PANEL 00ccccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeennseeeeeseaeeeenenns 19 OVERVIEW e E casera seeeuse tease cassecs ess teeta usseasecatuects a E E E 19 ADDING EDITING ROUTERS IN THE SYSTEM cccesccssscecesecesseeceeeeencecueeeeneecsnecesncecsaceseaeecaeeseneecueeeeneeceeeseneeceeeeeaeeceeeseneeenaes 20 Axia Livewire Routing System Axia Audio GPIO IPort Mpeg s ccsccescesecsseesseeeeeseeeseeeeeeecescenaeceaecaecsuecaeeeseeeseeenaes 22 LSVSLEMS Vid CO QU Prusia its 27 Pathfinder Remote GPIO ByPort By Pit ic sscccsssccesesessseensecesncecnseceencecsseceeneecsnecsencecsaecseneecsaeceeneecsaeceeneecaeeeeneecaeseeneeeaeens 30 IMITA ARAN 34 SAPO OU ocio aora eee eee 35 NTI VCO Mixic ciccdeecadecdaccssereles see tsaee veshnin E AEE E Glee Vbod eee EEE E E RS EA E E RE RNE 36 CEPA ROUET oer E EE E E E E E E E E E E E TE 37 Virtual ROUTES lt lt EERE REEE E E AREE VE E E A EEE E VEES 37 EDITING ROUTE POINT NAMES ssiri innata E EE KOEKE eE Ee D er E EE E E ENE EE ESEN 37 PATHFINDERPC PRO SERVER MENU ITEMG cccccsseecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeneneeeesnseeeeneeseeeeeennnss 39 FEE MENU erneer eE a Ee ER ESE AE HAES 39 Master TGP IP
92. First in the Panel Designer if you click on the main panel you will find a property called Default Graphics Path In this field you can select a network share to which all of the client applications have access Then if the graphics files are placed in this share they can be found by all instances running the program The second possibility is that the files can be installed in a folder called PanelGraphics within the PathfinderPC Client or Mini installation folder that will use them When the panel is opened graphics files will be searched for in each of these two locations By using custom background and button pictures we have already seen some incredibly slick and creative panels being used in the field There is a clock control with a variety of properties that can be positioned and resized on the form You can display the clock with and without the face hashes and numbers and with your own background picture and or colors so that the clock can be customized for the look your panel requires It can also be switched between analog and digital Meter controls are also available to PathfinderPro users to display dynamic metering for a source or destination There two meter controls in the toolbox A standard meter and a meterfader The standard meter can be dropped onto a form and assigned to a router and source or destination and it will supply metering for the source or O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 172 destination The Me
93. Generic Bridge Application La Software Authority Generic Bridge Jay File Ports Status Bytes In Bytes Out Serial Port Open cosa am EAT Server ATCP closed o f oo Server BTCP Closed o0 f oo Version 1 02 This is the main screen of the bridge application The indicator dots will be either red indicating that the port is not open or connected or green meaning the port is open and connected The Status Field shows the current Status of the connection The Bytes In and Out fields show a byte count which resets when it reaches a certain size but is a good indication that traffic is flowing through the bridge properly The text window at the bottom of the screen displays event messages When you start the application for the first time the configuration screen will also be displayed This screen is also available through the File Menu Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 241 a Settings Serial Port TCP Client al o N Server A Port 0 Server A IP 127 0 0 1 Server A IP 57600 E 8 1 Server B Port ro Server B IP 127 0 0 1 Serial To TCP Translation Send Immediately e Use Timer gt 5 Milliseconds Use End Of Message C 20D 04 Save Cancel This screen allows you to define the serial TCP and translation settings for the bridge Select the serial port number to use as well as the serial port settings The serial port settings are entered in the format Baud Parity D
94. Livewire 172 16 1 201 DanLivewire 239 192 0 23 Studio_4 Studio_4 ON DanLivewire 172 16 1 201 DanLivewire 239 192 0 24 InsertSource_la InsertSource_1a ON DanLivewi 172 16 1 201 DanLivewire 239 192 0 25 InsertSource_2 InsertS ource_2 ON DanLivewire 172 16 1 201 DanLivewire 239 192 0 26 InsertSource_3 InsertSource_3 ON DanLivewire 172 16 1 201 DanLivewire 239 192 0 27 InsertSource_4 InsertSource_4 ON DanLivewire 172 16 1 201 DanLivewire 239 192 0 28 Pam 1 ON Livewire 172 16 1 60 Livewire 239 192 0101 Pam 2 ON Livewire 172 16 1 60 Livewire 239 192 0 102 CR Monitor ON Livewire 172 16 1 60 Livewire 239 192 0 110 CR Headphn ON Livewire 172 16 1 60 Livewire 239 192 0111 Preview ON Livewire 172 16 1 60 Livewire 239 192 0112 Talk CR ON Livewire 172 16 1 60 Livewire 239 192 0 113 Guest H P ON Livewire 172 16 1 60 Livewire 239 192 0114 Pam 4 Rerd ON Livewire 172 16 1 60 Livewire 239 192 0 103 Pgm 4 ON Livewire 172 16 1 60 Livewire 239 192 0 104 VMIX 1 fader 1 ON Livewire 172 16 1 60 Livewire 239 192 0 211 VMIX 1 fader 2 ON Livewire 172 16 1 60 Livewire 239 192 0 212 VMIX 1 fader 3 ON Livewire 172 16 1 60 Livewire 239 192 0 213 VMIX 1 fader 4 ON Livewire 172 16 1 60 Livewire 239 192 0 214 10 00 y MM wN 0 00 MM 00 J M0 UN Click the header bar with the column name for any column to sort the list by that column in ascending order Click the footer bar for the particular column to sort the list by that column in descending order Dr
95. LivewireAnlg LivewireAnlg LivewireAnlg LivewireAnlg LivewireAnlg LivewireAnlg LivewireAnlg 8 AO Uu un Page 206 End DestNames 1 gt gt Echo This command Echose whatever comes after it to all connected sessions of this protocol translator Example gt gt Echo Hello Hello gt gt EventEngineStatus This command displays the status of the event engine Example gt gt EventEngineStatus StandardEvents On StackEvents On gt gt Exit This command logs off and closes the TCP connection to the server It is the same as Quit Example gt gt Exit Connection to host lost GetBufferSizes This command returns the size of the send and receive buffers in the system Alias gbs Example gt gt GetBufferSizes LivewireUnit 172 16 251 48 LWRPReceiveBufferSize 0 PBayCommun RouteConn 2 ReceiveBufferSize 0 LivewireUnit 172 16 251 49 LWRPReceiveBufferSize 0 PBayCommun RouteConn 2 ReceiveBufferSize 0 LivewireUnit 172 16 251 50 LWRPReceiveBufferSize 0 PBayCommun RouteConn 2 ReceiveBufferSize 0 LivewireUnit 172 16 251 51 LWRPReceiveBufferSize 0 PBayCommun RouteConn 2 ReceiveBufferSize 0 LivewireUnit 172 16 251 52 LWRPReceiveBufferSize 0 PBayCommun RouteConn 2 ReceiveBufferSize 0 LivewireUnit 172 16 251 53 LWRPReceiveBufferSize 0 PBayCommun RouteConn 2 ReceiveBufferSize 0 GetList This command returns lists of system information See the GetList function documentation for details on this command and its usage Ge
96. OS OCKCER ti i a a a a A E 39 User Database and Password MOde ooooooocccnnonocoononnncnnnnannnnnonoononnnnn EEE E EE E E 40 Email Alert SCUMGS diia 42 PUIDC eU A O 42 LIC Mita a E AR E N a cites aa Ea nino EEE A ER 43 VIEW MENU cnra a a t A ae e aeaa a AAEE N R a aeaa a e aae aaa e naa aA aS e ERa Raa SEE 44 SCHIPE DEDUR BEF iii iii ls ii ida 44 DTC a E 44 PREFERENCES MENO att e et aeia E Ea ae aea eae la aetan EEE to td a 45 SUENCE Threshold Bee Et A E A A 45 CHpping Threshold eiii 45 Log Settings ii iia 45 Lop LOA O 45 Log to TCP Port dec 45 Log to UDP SySl0 Was A ied SG tits 45 Remember Memory Slots between Restarts ccscccssccesscecsseceeneeenseceencecsaeceeceecsaeceencecsueceeneecaeceeneecsaeceeneecaeeeeneesaeeeeneeeaeees 45 HELP MENU nora la iia 45 Heli A A A AL AE OE EAE EAR a EE TEE 45 About P thfinderP O Server A A E Sues Saga a A EEA EEO EA 46 SELEG LLIS ui a el ale lini aie aie a ed ee ete 46 STANDARD EVENT SYSTEM cccccccccsseeeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeneneeeeeneneeeessasseeseeaaeeeesasaseseeeseneeesnsnessessanenes 47 TIME BASED EVENTS od ad nde ide arcas 48 AUDIO BASED EVENTS sucinta AA ia di EIA 49 ORIO EVENTS ada eo EE 32 O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 4 STACKINGEVENTS dt Dec 54 STACK EVENT EXAMPLE GPI TRIGGERED ROUTE WITH EMAlL cocococononoccnnninnonanonancnnononanononnoncnanan anno cone ro nana nn cra noncranan ne noninos 54 Example 1 GPI Triggered Route and Emdll cnion
97. PathfinderPC Router Control Software User s Guide Ax Version 5 31 August 2015 Customer Service We support you By Phone Faxin the USA e Customer service is available from 9 30 AM to 6 00 PM USA Eastern Time Monday through Friday at 1 216 241 7225 Fax 1 216 241 4103 By E Mail The address is Support AxiaAudio com Via World Wide Web e The Axia Web site has a variety of information which may be useful for product selection and support The URL is http www AxiaAudio com Feedback We welcome feedback on any aspect of Axia products or this manual In the past many good ideas from users have made their way into software revisions or new products Please contact us with your comments Updates Periodic updates of this software may become available To determine if this is the case please check our web site Our electronic newsletter has announcements of major software updates for existing products as well as keeping you up to date on the latest Axia Telos and Omnia product releases To subscribe go to http www axiaaudio com news eNews htm Trademarks Telos Systems Axia Audio Path nderPC Livewire the Livewire Logo the Axia logo SmartSurface SmartQ Omnia the Omnia logo and the Telos logo are trademarks of TLS Corporation All other trademarks are the prop erty of their respective holders Axia Audio 1241 Superior Ave Cleveland OH 44114 USA 1 216 241 7225 Inquiry AxiaAudio com
98. RAE aE SET T sees ges ES E EA RE ates 111 Software Authority Protocol vuitton 111 O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 5 Pro Bel General Router and Pro Bel General Switcher Protocol Translators cccccccccccccccccccccccccccececesesesesssesesesssesessseees 112 GENETIC Proton AE 113 Sine ACUEN Prophet Version aoni ee aE S ibi S E EENS 113 Kolere eRT EATA E EER 117 MTLISECOND COUNTER a iia ie dada 118 DATE OE MESSAGES e beh te ates sire Re oooh de Nass coe hail ob ea ads ih Set oo 8e J ees alee 118 TIME OR MESSAGE 000 ia bits 118 SERVERIBADDRESS ES 118 MESSAGE SEVERA Y daa 118 MESSAGELD NUMBER e ede ede a ao Mc Ait als 118 MESSAGE SOURCE es 118 REMOTE DEVICE o 119 MESSAGE DATA A a ieee iesnas 119 LOGGING CONFIGURATION 30 E sisceeed Je eisai E ad ks acne ae hia ee ee acest et Ao ME 119 ConnectMessage Secada A da 122 RouterDeviceReceivedCommand Section o cccccccccscseccccceccsvesescecececsessnusaeceeeceesenusaeeececeeseussaeeeeeceesesesaeeeeececsesesaeseeeeeceeseeeaes 123 DAA TINA IAS A AA NN 124 DETVETACILON didas ideas 125 A A A E OTS 0 NE Gee REE REI ORES Sa RENAE EE OS tb ii EE ES 127 CUEVA Go ee EL Ete EES EES GEES TR 133 LOG MESSAGE CUSTOM GROUP TYPES ssssccesssscecesssececesssecsessececsesaececsessecsssueeecsenaececsssecsesueeecseaaececsaesecsesaesecseaaeeeenenseesees 135 ROUTER Device e CORONER ts SOTA ROS aa sate 135 SLACK ARS NO 135 EVE AO aaa aaa ie io 135 Protocol TranslatoT AN NON 135 Cl A e
99. Select the Type of Events to view according to what type of Show Events event they C By Calendar Done are E e O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 161 Events can also be added edited and PF diia removed from the event list window The event wizard screens are the Evert Type Dele Jime Siaus SS same as for the server application MLShow Switch to Pre Route 11 2 2004 11 00 00 PM Pending See the event section under PathfinderPC Server in this document for more details Remove File Menu The File Menu provides acces to a number of master functions The Connect To Server menu item opens a window where you can enter the IP address of the PathfinderPC Server to which the client should connect The Clear Routes On Shutdown is a very little used option If this item is selected any routes that are made by that instance of PathfinderPCClient will be cleared when the client is shut down This can be useful in a recording studio environment where you wish to clear the system at the end of the day but is not recommended for radio station environments This option should generally be left off The Search menu item opens a search window similar to the one in the Route Control toolbar See the search section above for details on the PathfinderPC Search functions Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 162 The Events menu item opens the same event editor wizard as
100. TimeDown lt ElementIP gt lt SubmixerNumber gt lt ChannelNumber gt lt TimeDown gt Changes the fade down time on a VMIX Channel on an Element in seconds This is only valid for Axia Audio Routers at this point in time Example gt gt VMIXTimeDown 172 16 1 60 1 5 0 0 OK gt gt VMIXState lt ElementIP gt lt SubmixerNumber gt O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 217 Gets the state of all channels of a VMixer This is only valid for Axia Audio Routers at this point in time This command is not fully implemented at this point in time Example gt gt VMIXState 172 16 1 50 1 SUB 1 IN 1 ON 0 0 db 0 5 Secs 0 5 Secs SUB 1 IN 2 OFF 0 0 db 0 5 Secs 0 5 Secs SUB 1 IN 3 OFF 0 0 db 0 5 Secs 0 5 Secs SUB 1 IN 4 OFF 0 0 db 0 5 Secs 0 5 Secs SUB 1 IN 5 OFF 0 0 db 0 5 Secs 0 5 Secs VMIXTimeUp lt ElementIP gt lt SubmixerNumber gt lt ChannelNumber gt lt TimeUp gt Changes the fade up time on a VMIX Channel on an Element in seconds This is only valid for Axia Audio Routers at this point in time Example gt gt VMIXTimeUp 172 16 1 60 1 5 0 0 OK gt gt Server To Client Commands Only UserCommand This allows a script or Stack Event to send custom user information to the protocol translator port Example Begin User Command lt User Information as defined in stack event or script gt End User Command RouteStat lt RouterNumber gt lt DestinationNumber gt lt SourceNumber gt lt Locked TruelFalse gt
101. X X Pro Bel General Router X X Pro Bel General Switcher X X Sine ACU 1 X X Standard Events X X X Time Based Route Change X X X Time Based Scene Change X X X GPIO Based Route Change X X X Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 14 GPIO Based Scene Change Silence Detect Backup Route gt gt Stack Events Detect Activate Routes Activate Scenes Audio Level Silence Detect Detect Activate GPIO Software Panel Button Control LCD Panel Button Control Element Fader On Off Element Motorized Fader Control Time Date Range User Command Send Receive Generic Translator P P lt PS P lt PS PS P lt PST P lt gt lt P P lt PS P lt PS P lt P lt PST P lt gt lt Memory Values Event Engine Start Element Profile Change Element Console Fader Change On Off Pgm Assign VMIX Control P lt P lt P lt P lt Send Email Run Script SA Command Shell Command Node Gain Control Device Failure Detection AES Sync Loss Detection Livewire Stream Fail System Zip One Control IPort Control P P lt PS P lt P lt PS PS PS P lt PS P lt gt lt P P lt PS P lt PS PS P lt PS P lt PS PS OX Panels Mini Client Panel Designer Buttons Labels
102. a particular room and or to tie points together from different kinds of routers Audio Video Machine Control mapped as single point 10 Event Programming duplicate interface as server for creating standard events 11 User Panel Viewing and manipulation Panel Designer Panel Designer is a graphical tool to create custom user panels It allows the user to drag and drop controls onto a panel and then assign colors pictures and textual properties to them These controls can then be made to activate routes or scene changes or to trigger more complex tasks through Stacking Events The software buttons can also be mapped to either GPIO hardware buttons or Element User Panel buttons These hardware buttons will then perform the same tasks as the software buttons PathfinderPC Mini PathfinderPC Mini is an application that will run and display a single Custom User panel designed by the Panel Designer This should be used on computers where the Administrator does not want the end user to have all of the power and options of the full PathfinderPC Client application The Administrator can design a custom user panel for the end user that provides access to the few needed resources PathfinderPC Mini is then used to display that panel on the end user s computer Protocol Translation Bridges The PathfinderPC software suite has also been augmented with two different software bridge products These bridges convert serial port commands to TCP commands for cont
103. accomplish some of the programming the software needs to know the password of the unit By default it displays the factory default password If you have changed this password already you will have to provide the actual password in order to complete the programming Finally the software will offer to change the password to a new one if you so desire When the Progress Bar shows fF Livewire IP Addressing programming complete you have the option to click New Livewire to a program another unit or Finish to ii ee ee finish assigning addressing to the IPAddress 192 168 1 15 livewire terminals Livewire Name Test Press the ID Button on the Livewire to which this information should be assigned Progress Cancel lt lt Back Finish Once the IP addresses and names have been assigned to all terminals the terminals should be rebooted to make sure the changes are stored properly Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 238 O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 239 Appendix D Legacy Software Authority Bridge Applications The bridging applications in this appendix have largely been replaced with the SAPortRouter application described earlier in this document They are still included and a part of this documentation for two reasons First there are still some customers using them Second the ACU 1 bridge will still outperform SAPortRouter for that specific application This is becaus
104. action double clicking may be faster If you are creating a logic flow it is sometimes easier to drag the various qualifiers and actions you will need into the correct boxes and then double click each of them afterwards to fill in the properties lx Name MyEvent Other Details x a Description Qualifiers 1 Logic All Qualifier Details Open Palette y Actions If Met 0 Source Destination Delayed Actions If Met 0 Delay 5 seconds Use LOCK state Lock ia Actions If Not Met 0 a Delayed Actions If Not Met 0 Delay 5 seconds _ Move Up Move Down Cut Copy Paste Add Edt Remove Use the fields on the right to select the properties that define the specific qualifier or action Some fields depend on data from the other fields before they will become available You can also copy qualifiers and actions using the cut cupy paste links or by simply dragging an existing qualifier in the list to an empty spot in the list In the case of actions you can also drag an action from one list to another to make a copy into another list This can be very useful if you want an action with generally the same properties with perhaps a single change You can set one up with the correct properties in the Actions If Met list and then drag copy it to the Actions if Not Met list and make the change for what should be different The Open Palette button will allow you to quick
105. age 153 Scenes The items within the scene menu and scene drop down list change automatically depending on which router is currently selected These are a list of scenes stored on the server for that particular router A new scene may be captured and edited using the Edit and Capture Scene menu items Clicking capture scene Rage vere Violen will produce the amp Source Destination Description following window Cot DST 1 CD 1 ON DanLiveAuc Zz SRC 7 DST 2 SRC 7 ON DanLived S SRCE DST 3 SRC 6 ON DanLiveA1 DST 4 SRC 5 ON DanLive 41 DST5 SRC 4 ON DanLive 41 DST6 SRC 3 ON DanLive41 DST 7 CD 2 ON DanLiveAuc DST 1 CD 1 ON DanLiveAuc Cancel Close At this point the scene contains the current state of all rows in the router Routes in the scene may be edited without changing the master router by clicking the edit route button or double clicking the line to change the source Rows may be removed from the scene to create a partial scene In this way a scene may be created which just changes a few points to a particular state rather than changing the entire router Removed rows may be added back using the Add Rows button The Store Scene button stores this scene into the PathfinderPC Server s database for the particular router A valid name must be entered into the Scene Name field before it can be stored The scene is then added to the list under the scene menu on the main screen when that particular router is selected Th
106. agging a O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 150 column header will allow you to reorder the columns Press the Close button to close the window Select the source or destination in the list that you want applied to the drop down list in the previous window Then click select or double click the entry to select that entry and cause the select list to disappear This process may be alternatively used to select sources and destinations in both the client and server wherever a drop down list is presented Metering Right clicking on route points which support audio metering as indicated by the audio columns in the grid will open a fully functional set of meters for that route point Patch File Bay a Contro Router or User Group Dan udio v l l l None gt PC 21 ON satestserver En fe Routes C Scenes None gt PC 22 ON satestserver SCIC Source 2 None gt PC 23 ON satestserver with sa_server_01 X El j None gt PC 24 ON satestserver Destination 37 CLY DeskMic ON PSIO 001 055 gt Channel1 ON PowerSt 001 053 meter mern y None gt Return 1 ON PowerSt 001 053 bri d ge gt None gt Return ON PowerSt 001 053 I Lock None gt CR Monitor ON PowerSt 001 053 open None gt CR Headphonesn ON PowerSt 001 053 Clear Take None gt Studio Monitor ON PowerSt 001 053 Schedule None gt Source Preview ON PowerSt 001 053 None gt External Preview ON Powe
107. ailable Scenarios 1 John the sedentary station manager decides he wants to build a new stack event to start his coffee brewing when he loads his profile in the morning Since the IT department will not let him near the server room and his sedentary lifestyle makes the flights of stairs abhorrent to get there anyway it is important that he be able to build this new event from a simple User Interface on his workstation that can then be copied or uploaded to the server See stack event Ul tool spec in development In order for this to work the new Ul tool must be able to obtain the lists of closures and profiles so that he can select his profile and the GPIO contact closure for the coffee maker Enter GetList Function 2 A new Automation System developer Automated Disc Jockeys wants to support Axia Since PFS already does all of the hard work of finding and communicating with all of the equipment it makes sense for the automation system to talk through PFS But the system designer wants to be able to display the route names in their User Interface for macro development etc Enter GetList Function Nongoals 1 While this function will duplicate some already existing listing functions we will leave the other functions intact for existing users in the field We will not phase out those functions 2 Within PFS are already several functions for obtaining lists of routers sources Destinations etc Where possible these will be reused but if
108. als have been pre configured please skip to the section on adding Axia devices to the routing table To access the IP Address Helper tool select the Utilities Menu from the Axia Livewire setup screen and select IP Address Helper While the IP address helper tool below can be useful it is often recommended to set the nodes up directly through their web pages That option will work as well and is the only option for configuring the Element CPUs and Engines Ei Please Note If the server computer has multiple NIC cards installed the following screen will be presented Select the IP Address of the NIC card that is connected to the switch which has the Livewire units attached to it This Computer has Multiple NIC Cards Please select the NIC card which is attached to the Livewire switch Click Next 192 168 1 101 E Livewire IP Addressing Finish Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 237 Enter the IP Address and unique name E Livewire IP Addressing for the first Livewire in the system Enter the IP Adress and Name of the first Livewire IPAddress 1192 168 1 15 Livewire Name Click Next Cancel lt lt Back Finish The server is now ready to program the first unit and is listening for a request from the unit Press the ID button on the unit to which you want this IP Address and Name to be assigned The server should hear the request and program the unit In order to
109. ames and descriptions may be altered by editing the field in the table ES Routers A TES Destination Names Name Description Ps 10 DST 1 PS IO DST1 ONF PS 10 DST 2 PS 10 DST 2 ON F PS 10 DST 3 PS 10 DST 3 ONF PS I0 DST 4 PS 10 DST 4 ONF PSIODST5 PS 10 DST 5 ONF PS 10 DST 6 PS I0 DST 6 ON F P510 DST PS 10 DST 7 ONF PS 10 DST 8 PS 10 DST 8 ONF Proc Output Proc Output ON O Return 1 Return 1 ON Rom Return 2 Return 2 ON Rom CR Monitor CR Monitor ON Rc Source Names Name CLY DeskMic PSIO 02 PSIO 03 PSIO 04 PSIO 05 PSIO 06 PSIO 07 PSIO 08 Proc Output Pgm 1 Pgm 2 Pgm 4 Rerd PSIO 02 ON PSIO PSIO 03 ON PSIO PSIO 04 ON PSIO PSIO 05 ON PSIO PSIO 06 ON PSIO PSIO 07 ON PSIO PSIO 08 ON PSIO Proc Output ON O Pgm 1 ON Romul Pgm 2 ON Romul Pam 4 Rerd ON R Aux Send 1 Aux Send 1 ON Rc Aux Send 2 Aux Send 2 ON Rc CR Direct CR Direct ON Ror CR Monitor CR Monitor ON Rc CR Headphonesn CR Headphonesr Studio Monitor Studio Monitor ON Source Preview Source Preview O External Preview External Preview C CR Headphn Edit CR Headphn ON Remove VMIX 1in1 VMIX 1in1 ON Ro Depending on the router type selected there may be some additional options available through this screen For example Axia Audio and Gpio routers have some additional columns which may be viewed b
110. and a routing switcher was something only the richest stations could afford Axia shocked everyone with the idea that studio peripherals from the console to the audio processor could be networked and that everyone could have the benefits of a routing switcher for about a third of the cost of traditional technology When we launched Axia Telos founder Steve Church made a prediction Three things will happen Steve told us First people will say that 1t will never work When they re proven wrong they ll say It works but you don t need that And finally as they see Axia becoming successful theyll say IP Audio We do that too Steve as always was right on the money In 10 years Axia Livewire has become the world s most popular IP Audio networking technology and our mixing consoles are the world s best selling they re on air in over 4 000 studios and counting You ll find Axia equipment everywhere at privately owned stations and large clusters run by big conglomerates At established public broadcasters and at newly licensed International stations At government broadcast facilities and podcast studios Needless to say we re humbled by the trust broadcasters place in us and by your enthusiasm Being first with new technology is nice but we ve never been content to rest on our laurels So the Telos R amp D team continues to innovate and expand the scope of IP Audio Axia
111. are executed if the set of qualifiers are evaluated to be true The list of Delayed Actions If Met is also executed if the set of qualifiers are evaluated to be true Sometimes 1t is useful to have a delay before the actions are executed The Actions if Not Met and Delayed Actions If Not Met are the same as the previous action lists except they get executed if the qualifiers are evaluated as false You can think of this as an If Then Else logic with delays that are also possible An event must have a qualifier and some actions to be a valid event but there do not have to be actions in all of the action lists The right hand side of the screen will either show lists of available qualifiers and action types that can be dragged into the system or the actual editable properties of a specific qualifier or action that is selected in one of the lists To add qualifiers or Actions click the Add button and select qualifier or action and a list of qualifiers or actions will appear in the right hand side of the editor lO xi Name MyEvent Other Details Description Qualifiers 0 Logic All Qualifier Details Open Palette y Name Type Description pa gt D ition y double click to add an item and close the palette Actions If Met 0 re Triggers from or makes a route Silence Detect A Triggers from a specific length of silence on a given LW cha Audio Clipping Delayed Actions If Met 0 Delay ls seconds 2 MS Triggers
112. as Failed This could either be due to audio failure on both primary and backup sources or the current route is not set to either Primary or Backup In addition these indicators will change from colored to grey to indicate the status has entered the pending timeout period and is waiting the required timeout period before making a switch Finally there is a column which shows the description field This is a combination of the description information from both source and destination points Select List Throughout the PathfinderPC Server and Client software there will be drop down lists when sources and destinations need to be selected for events stack events route selections etc Next to these drop down lists will also be a button identified by an ellipsis Clicking the ellipsis button will open a select window from which the source or destination may be selected as an alternative to finding the point in the drop down list This window includes a grid with additional information about the sources or destinations including Name Pathfinder Number Description Host IP Host Name Axia Channel Number etc The grid may be sorted by any of the columns and the columns may be resized and reordered Souce Nowe 8 Deserbtion _ __ Host P____ Host Name_ Host Pot Avie Channel Avie Stee _ a 1 Studio_1 ON DanLivewire 16 1 201 Tr aa 192 0 21 Studio_2 Studio_2 ON DanLivewire 172 16 1 201 DanLivewire 239 192 0 22 Studio_3 Studio_3 ON Dan
113. ata This column contains the textual information for the specific log message Except for the MillisecondCounter the TCP and UDP syslog messages contain the same information except that they are forced to comply with the standard syslog format See http tools ietf org html rfc3164 for a description of this format Again there are a host of available syslog capture tools for capturing displaying and working with the syslog messages sent to these ports Logging Configuration The PathfinderPC Server system allows you great flexibility in deciding which messages should be logged and which should be ignored Some messages are really more for debugging a certain problem and due to the volumes of log information they generate should only be turned on in those circumstances The interface for making these configuration settings is available by clicking on the Log Settings menu item under the Preferences menu This will display the following configuration screen AE Log item Name i Group Type Edit Groups ConnectMessage ALL Router Device RouterDeviceReceivedCommand None Router Device RouterEvents Various Router Device ServerActionSent None Various ServerEvents Various Various ClientEvents None Client Low Medium C High Custom First you will notice that we have provided a Low Medium and High setting This allows the general user to automatically get a basic logging setup quickly
114. ata Bits StopBits Valid settings for Parity are E Event O Odd S Space N None M Mark Valid Settings for Data Bits are ZO un A Valid Settings for Stop Bits are 1 1 5 2 So a complete serial port settings field might look like 57600 N 8 1 For 57600 baud No Parity 8 Data Bits and 1 Stop bit Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 242 Next enter the TCP Port and IP address for the Primary and Secondary PathfinderPC Servers into the TCP Client fields Finally select the translation settings The translation settings define how the serial data will be packaged into TCP packets to send to the PathfinderPC Server The first option Send Immediately forwards the information as soon as it receives it While this may sound ideal it can actually be very inefficient The computer is fast enough to know about every byte that comes into a serial port and this option will send each byte as its own TCP packet with any overhead involved in the TCP header and trailer information So while this can work for certain situations it is not the most recommended setting The second setting Use Timer allows you to set a millisecond counter This will hold any data that comes in for the specified number of milliseconds while waiting for additional data and then package all of it as a single TCP packet This will be more efficient than the previous setting as long as the controlling application does not c
115. ay be sent by PathfinderPC Server and each may be selectively turned on and off by clicking the appropriate menu items The Log To File menu item will create a new log file each day and store it in the Syslogs folder located within the PathfinderPC Server folder The Log to TCP Port 5400 menu item will send log commands in the standard syslog format to any clients connected to the TCP port 5400 and the Log to UDP Syslog menu item allows you to send the log entries to a centralized syslog capture computer This option also sends the messages in standard syslog format The syslog log format is an Internet standard and there are many available capture and data manipulation tools for standard syslog data Some are even free and or open source tools available on the Internet for Syslog capture and data manipulation For an example see http www kiwisyslog com By using a standard log capturing format the PathfinderPC Server logs are open to all of the myriad of tools available on the Internet for the manipulation of this data The UDP syslog also allows you to send syslog data from a variety of devices to the same server and thereby combine all of a facility s log information For example if you are using a clustered PathfinderPC intstallation you could have the syslog server capture the data from both servers in the same location according to the message time stamps and sources See the instructions for the syslog capture tool for more details Both t
116. be the original controlling computer In several installations we have used the bridge in the background of a Prophet automation or routing system The Prophet uses Serial Port 1 on the computer and the bridge uses Serial port 2 Then a simple null modem cable between the ports allows the Prophet to think it is addressing a different device See the diagram above The bridge then converts the traffic to TCP and sends it on to the PathfinderPC Servers Before you use the bridge application you need to set up the Protocol Translator in Pathfinder For example if you are going to use the bridge on a Prophet Router to convert the Probel protocol from serial to TCP add a Probel translator in PathfinderPC and select a TCP port rather than a serial port When you create the translator in PathfinderPC Server be sure to select the option to make the translator stop and start with the event system on the last screen of the wizard This will ensure that the translator is only open on the Server in the cluster that currently owns the event system If you do not select this option the bridge will be able to connect to both servers at the same time and will send duplicate information to both servers and both servers will try to act upon those commands After the installation is complete and the protocol translator is set up in Pathfinder run the bridge application Let s look at the configuration and usage of the Generic bridge application first Software Authority
117. bine to form an incredibly powerful facility wide routing control software suite O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 12 System Requirements PathfinderPC Client Applications The PathfinderPC Client PathfinderPC Mini Panel Designer SAPortRouter VMIXControl and the bridge application programs will all run on Windows XP 2003 Server 2008 Server 2012 Server Windows 7 and Windows 8 Minimum hardware system requirements for these operating systems are also acceptable to run these applications In addition Microsoft Net 3 5 SP1 is required This is usually installed automatically on current versions of Windows XP and above You can also obtain this framework for free through the Microsoft Windows Update system Finally Windows 7 8 2008 and 2012 require that the startup links be set to Run as Administrator in the compatibility frame After installing the application browse to the folder where the application is installed This is usually C Program Files PathfinderPC or C Program Files PathfinderMini Right click on the executable and select properties Click on the Compatibility tab and turn on the Run as Administrator check box PathfinderPC Pro Server PathfinderPRO Server will also run under Windows XP 2003 Server 2008 Server 2012 Server and Windows 7 However there are some limitations that need to be considered when choosing an operating system for PathfinderPC Server All Microsoft workstation ope
118. book 172 16 4 1 2014 02 03_12 18 04_001_001 Avail ID Name Group Type Combo O ZephyriP10 ZephyriP10 public tscp ZephyrlP10 public tscp 4 AxiaLABwest AxiaLABwest public tscp AxiaLABwest public tscp EndList Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 235 GetList Version For each command above calling GetListVersion and the same parameters will return a list version number command only in the format ListVersion lt Command gt lt Arguments gt lt Version gt Example GetListVersion DanPanel Butto Return ListVersion DanPanel Button 2007 07 14_13 15 22_00 O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 236 Appendix C IP Address Assignment Tool If IP addresses and names have not already been programmed into the Terminals PathfinderPC Server includes a tool to aid in this process To access the tool select the Utilities Menu from the Axia Livewire setup screen and select IP Address Helper Please note that at this point in time due to changes and additions to the Axia product line this tool is somewhat limited in its capabilities It is recommended that the initial IP address and Channel assignment configuration be accomplished through each device s web page interface The IP address helper tool below only works with Axia nodes at this point in time It will not automatically configure Axia Elements Engines or Drivers These must be initially configured through their own interfaces Assigning IP Addresses If the system termin
119. bscribe Silence Subscribe Gpiochanges Subscribe Gpiochanges lt RouterNumber gt Subscribe FileLoads Subscribe IOStateChanges Subscribe IOStateChanges lt RouterNumber gt Subscribe Vmixstate Subscribe Vmixgain Example gt gt Unsubscribe Memory Unsubscribed from Memory Slot Changes Verbose This command accepts the arguments On or Off If verbose mode is on certain commands such as RouteStat SourceNames and DestinationNames will carry some additional columns of information Example gt gt Verbose On Verbose On gt gt The following additional information is provided when verbose mode is on MemorySlot command 4 tab delineated columns are added to the Memory slot response These columns contain the source object that Created Last Modified and Last Read the memory slot in question RouteStat and GetList RouteStat commands Verbose mode adds two columns to the route stat command for Axia Routers These columns are DestinationVerbose and SourceVerbose These columns carry literal IP Port and name information for the source and destination port involved in the route O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 216 Additionally if the router is an Axia GPIO router two more columns are added called DestinationGPIORW and SourceGPIORW These columns show the read and write state of the GPI and GPO pins of the source and destination ports involved in the route Since GPI pins cannot be tripped on hardware ports they ar
120. button states that will make the qualifier True Select the Key State Up Down or No Change You can also enter colors and caption information as part of the qualifier The primary colors can be entered by name for example Red Green Blue You can match subtler color shades by using RGB values in the hexadecimal format amp HBBGGRR For example amp HOOFFOO would produce green Any field that is set to No Change or is blank will not be considered when analyzing the qualifier Any field that does have information in it will have to match the actual button condition for the qualifier to be True Any fields that have information in them and are therefore being considered as part of the qualifier will cause the stack event to be Name UserButton Negate a Button Name MyPanel MyButton SCS Host IP TO Button Module 4 pea A Button Number o 1 e O No Change C Up Down Button Caption AS Key State Back Color On 2 No Change T AMA Back Color Off 4 No Change AMA Button State V No Change COn OF Ej Fash Y No Change con cor 1 Latching L Move Up Move Down Cut Copy Paste In most cases the only field you will use is the Key State field as that is how you will make specific actions happen when a button is pushed The latching option turns the button into a latching button When PathfinderPC Server sees that a button qualifier is looking for the button to be a latching button it
121. call state of a Zip UY On n e Negate P Zp One 172 16 4 1 ZIPOne Y Call State No Change m gt Move Up Move Dowr Cut Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 91 IPort Control This qualifier monitors the Output values and encoder and decoder states of an IPort For additional details regarding these parameters refer to the Iport manual Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 92 StackEvent Actions Activate Route This action will activate the route selected using the Router Source and Destination lists Tf the Lock Override is selected the route will be made regardless of whether the selected destination is currently locked unless it is system level locked on the device in a way PathfinderPC Server cannot change If the lock override is not selected the route will only be made if the destination is currently unlocked Tf the route can be made and the lock option is checked the software will also lock the destination after making the change 1 Pom 1 y sl gt Destination 10 VMIX 1 in 2 y il gt Lock E Overide Locks Move Up Move Down Cut Copy Paste Activate Scene i ices l This action will activate the selected scene on FE the selected router If the Lock Override is Description o selected all routes in the scene wil
122. cel Click Next and select who will be allowed to use the program J VMIXControl pr y Select Installation Folder The installer will install YMIxXControl to the following folder To install in this folder click Next To install to a different folder enter it below or click Browse Folder C Program Files S oftware Authority MIX Controls Browse Install VMIXControl for yourself or for anyone who uses this computer 0 Everyone Just me Continue to Click Next and Finish until the application is installed Configuring VMIXControl The first time VMIX control is launched it will look like this Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 185 IEA VMIX Control Version 1 04 I Engine 172 16 1 10 i VMIX Submixer 2 VMIX Submixer 3 VMIX Submixer 4 VMIX Submixer 5 VMIX Submixer 6 VMIX Submixer 7 VMIX Submixer 8 PFS Engine PFServer 127 0 0 1 In order to use VMIXControl you first must enter the PathfinderPro Server and the Axia Engine addresses that will be used by VMIXControl Click the Edit button to begin ai VMIX Control Version 1 04 PathfinderPC Server Primary 127 0 0 1 Backup 127 0 0 1 Username Admin Password Admin PFS Engine E PETE PFServer 127 0 0 1 Primary and Secondary IP Address Until you have an active connection to PathfinderPro the Engine IP address is not adjustable and in fact will not be visible i
123. cific device Command GetList VMIXChannels lt Device IP gt Example GetList VMIXChannels 172 16 1 53 Return Columns Availability ID ID of the VMIXChannel Name VMIXChannel Name Example BeginList VMIXChannels 172 16 1 53 2011 01 25_09 19 02_001 Avail ID Name 0 0 VMIX SUB 1 IN 1 0 1 VMIX SUB 1 IN 2 0 2 VMIX SUB 1 IN 3 20 Devices Returns a list of Devices in the system Command GetList Devices Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 231 Example GetList Devices Return Columns Availability ID ID of the Device Name Device Name Router The router which uses the device SerialPort The serial port used to control the device if applicable IP The IP address used to control the device if applicable Port The TCP ports used to control the device if applicable separated by a Type The type of device CAddr a combined address field Example BeginList Devices 2011 01 25_09 19 02_001 Avail Name Router SerialPort IP Port Type CAddr O PowerSt 001 053 1 172 16 1 53 93 4010 Axia PS_Engine 1_172 16 1 53_93 4010 O PSIO 001 055 1 172 16 1 55 93 4010 Axiaiceio 1_172 16 1 55_93 4010 O Engine 001 061 1 172 16 1 61 93 4010 Axia Engine 1_172 16 1 61_93 4010 21 AxiaUserModules Returns a list of Axia User Modules available on a specific device This command is not based on real data at this point in time but is used to create static option lists in the stack event editor Command GetLi
124. ck greeeesesosceseeoeseeesoeseeeeeeseeg Einish Next verify that the TCP setting username and password are correct for connecting to and logging into the router Click Next A X1 Audio UDP Router Wizard x Enter the Specific communication Settings IP Address 172 16 1 22 Winsock Port 91 UserName Password a lt lt Back ktt Cancel Next gt gt Finish Verify that the number of sources and destinations is correct for the given router Click Next again A XI Audio UDP Router Wizard xi Enter the Specific Number of Points on the Router Source Coordinates 256 Destination Coordinates 256 Finish Finally click Finish to add the router into the system E All Information has been collected for this Router Click Finish to Complete the Changes Next gt gt O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 34 SAPort Router The SAPortRouter is a router for controlling the SAPort Router service which ships with Pathfinder Pro This service allows dynamic routing of ascii data to and from serial and TCP ports manual on SAPort Router for details See the section later in this Since TCP IP winsock is the only method used by this router this option cannot be changed Click Next A SA Port Router Wizard x Please Select the format used to communicate with this Router Finish Next verify that the TCP setting user
125. ck that look like EVENT MOD_USER 3 BUT 6 KEY DOWN EVENT MOD_USER 3 BUT 6 KEY UP Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 171 The module number you are looking for is the number after MOD_USER In this case it would be 3 The button numbers start from 1 at the bottom of the button panel strip and count up to the top of the strip So enter the module number and the button number that should be mapped to the software button Then save the panel When you save the panel it will also create a HardwareMap file in the PFSPanels folder This file at the time of this writing is only read when the server starts so to get your hardware maps to work restart the PathfinderPC Server application Now 1f you have entered the Host IP and additional settings correctly those hardware controls should do exactly the same thing as the software buttons This is true whether or not the Client application has the panel open or is even running As long as the server is running those hardware controls will function In the case of the GPIO control whenever the route is active the GPO will be low causing the GPIO button to be lit Also pushing the button and closing the GPI will cause the route to be activated The same is true for the user panel buttons except that in that case the button s captions and colors will also match the software panel color and caption selections However 1f you are using certain custom colors it may take some tweaking to make
126. controller Prophet To test failover between clustered PathfinderPC Servers for the Bridge Application shut down PathfinderPC Server on the primary server that owns the event system When the Event System on the secondary server starts up and comes out of Standby its protocol translator port should also open and you will see the green dot appear on the secondary server TCP connection on the bridge Then when the Primary Server is restarted and takes over the Event System the connection dot should move back to the Server A TCP Connection on the bridge O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 245
127. ction should display all resources whether they are available or not TechNotes The XML Configuration for the stack event properties for the new Flow Chart Stack Event UI should include several fields to determine what is displayed from the returned list lt DisplayAvailability gt 0 1 4 5 lt DisplayAvailability gt This defines that rows that are system locked or disabled should not be listed in the UI lt DisplayColumns gt 2 3 lt DisplayColumns gt This defines which columns of returned data will be displayed Column counts start with 0 which is always the availability column lt StoredColumn gt 1 lt StoredColumn gt This defines which single column of returned data will be stored as the selected value when the stack event property is stored In order to reduce the server load the list and its version number should be cached by the calling application Use the GetListVersion to see if the list has changed before calling GetList for the same list again Return Example Note The example below has multiple tabs between some columns for readability The actual implementation will only have 1 tab between columns BeginList SourceNames 1 2007 07 14_14 26 07_001 Avail ID 0 1 0 2 EndList Required Lists Name Description MySource This is my Source YourSource This is your Source 1 Routers Returns the list of routers in the system Aliases rtr Command Software Authority Inc GetList Routers lt R
128. d If the IO number is not present the command will return all GPI statuses for the router The Router must be a GPIO router or an error will be returned Example gt gt GPIStat 2 GPIStat 2 1 hhhhh GPIStat 2 2 hhhhh GPIStat 2 3 hhhhh GPIStat 2 4 hhhhh GPIStat 2 5 hhhhh GPIStat 2 6 hhhhh GPIStat 2 7 hhhhh GPIStat 2 8 hhhhh GPIStat 2 9 hhhhh gt GPOStat lt RouterNumber gt lt IO Number gt O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 208 This command requests the state of a GPOPoint or all of the GPO points on a GPIO router It returns a GPOStat Command If the IO number is not present the command will return all GPI statuses for the router The Router must be a GPIO router or an error will be returned Example gt gt GPOStat 2 GPOStat 2 1 hhhhh GPOStat 2 2 hhhhh GPOStat 2 3 hhhhh GPOStat 2 4 hhhhh GPOStat 2 5 hhhhh GPOStat 2 6 hhhhh GPOStat 2 7 hhhhh GPOStat 2 8 hhhhh GPOStat 2 9 hhhhh gt Lecho This command stands for Local Echo and echos whatever comes after it to the local connected session Example gt Lecho Hello Hello gt gt Login lt UserName gt lt Password gt Logs in to the PathfinderPC Server system The Login username and password must match a valid user account in the PathfinderPC Server User database Logoff Logs Off The System Quit This command logs off and closes the TCP connection to the server It is the same as Exit Example gt gt Quit Connection to host
129. d and select Run as Administrator Click OK When you launch from this icon UAC will ask for confirmation and then you will be able to configure the settings for the service Multicast Gpio Service The multicast gpio service is an optional service that may be installed with a pro license on the PathfinderPC Server It allows the Pathfinder Administrator to add Multicast channel numbers to the Axia gpio router These additional ports in the router can then be used to directly detect and trigger console control commands without needing a physcial gpio device assigned to that channel number This service requires the full version not client version of net 4 0 to be installed on the server This can be obtained from Microsoft at http www microsoft com en us download details aspx id 17718 When you run the installer it may detect that Net 4 0 is not installed and take you to a page to download it from Microsoft Unfortunately this is the client Net 4 0 installer and not the full version If the client version is installed you will be able to install the multicast gpio service but it will not start up Use the link above to install the full version of Net 4 0 instead Once the service is installed and running there will be a new button on the Axia Gpio router wizard called Add MCast Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 202 ME Livewire Router Setup Wizard E x Utilities Add Livewire Terminals Select Networks to Scan
130. d the configuration of users are described in more detail under the users section of this document Next there is an option for setting email server settings for email alerts Finally the File menu lets the end user determine whether a username and password is needed for the client application to log into the server If this option is not turned on all copies of the client application will log in using full Administrator privileges Thus it is highly recommended that the password mode be set to Manual login required and the user database will then Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 19 be used to authenticate client access There is also a menu item to manage licensing so that upgrade licenses may be applied or license information retrieved The view menu provides a script debugger to which debug and error messages may be sent when writing and testing custom scripts It also provides access to a device list In an Axia network this will show a list of all of the devices on the network that the PathfinderPC Server knows about along with the type of device its IP address and links to the device s configuration page Under the Preferences menu the silence and clipping threshold may be set This is the audio threshold which will trigger either a clipping indication or a silence state in the system This menu also provides access to the logging system in PathfinderPC Server Finally there are options for automatically discoverin
131. d to occur Audio Based Events An Audio based event is a great way to introduce redundancy into a system At this point in time the Axia Audio Router is the only router in the system which supports audio based events as it is the only system which allows the server application to check and monitor audio levels and silence alarms in the routing devices themselves With this event you basically program the system to monitor a certain source destination route If the defined route is in place and if audio falls below a certain threshold on the destination for longer than a certain amount of time the router attempts to switch to a backup source If there is no audio on the backup source then the server fails the route until it is able to determine that audio is present on either the primary or backup source at which point it switches to that source If a user routes a source other than the primary or backup source to a monitored destination it is also considered a forced failure and the system stops attempting to make audio based routes on that destination until either the primary or backup source is again routed to the monitored destination Remember that since an Axia system is a distributed system there are multiple Axia units in a single Server router Thus hardware redundancy may be built into the system by selecting Primary and Backup routes on different Axia nodes Thus if the Axia device that houses the primary source becomes unavailable t
132. ddress with a slash and the host port 172 16 1 23 3 Example BeginList SourceDetails 1 2011 01 25_09 19 26_001 Avail ID Name Description Host IP Host Name Host Port Axia Channel Axia Stream IP 0 0 None Clear Route 0 1 Pgm1 Pgm 1 ON PowerSt 001 053 172 16 1 53 PowerSt 001 053 1 5301 239 192 20 181 0 2 Pgm2 Pgm2 ON PowerSt 001 053 172 16 1 53 PowerSt 001 053 2 5302 239 192 20 182 3 3 Pgm4Rcrd Pgm 4 Rerd ON PowerSt 001 053 172 16 1 53 PowerSt 001 053 3 5305 239 192 20 185 14 DestinationDetails Returns Details about the Destinations in a Router Command GetList DestinationDetails lt RouterNumber gt Example GetList DestinationDetails 1 Return Columns Availability ID Pathfinder ID Name The name of the destination Description The description of the destination Host IP The IP address of the host that serves the destination Host Name The name of the host that serves the destination Host Port The hosts s internal identifier for the destination Example BeginList DestinationDetails 1 2011 01 25_09 19 26 001 Avail ID Name Description HostIPHostName Host Port 2 1 Channell Channel1 ON PowerSt 001 053 172 16 1 53 PowerSt 001 053 1 2 2 _ Return1 Return 1 ON PowerSt 001 053 172 16 1 53 PowerSt 001 053 29 2 3 Return2 Return 2 ON PowerSt 001 053 172 16 1 53 PowerSt 001 053 30 O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 228 15 SourceDetailsStat Returns Details about the Sources in a Router which support
133. ders Returns a list of faders on a console Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 233 Command GetList ConsoleFaders lt Device IP Address gt Example GetList ConsoleFaders 172 16 1 53 Return Columns Availability ID ID of the Fader FaderAddress IPAddress followed by a slash and the fader number Example BeginList consolefaders 172 16 1 53 2011 01 25_10 34 25_001 Avail ID FaderAddress O 1 172 16 1 53 1 0 2 172 16 1 53 2 25 ConsoleFaderSourceList Returns a list of source profiles available to a fader Command GetList ConsoleFaderSourceList lt FaderAddress gt Example GetList ConsoleFaderSourceList 172 16 1 53 1 Return Columns Availability ID ID of the Source Profile from the device Name Name of the source profile Example BeginList ConsoleFaderSourceList 172 16 1 53 1 2011 01 25_1 0 36 59_001 Avail ID Name O 4 CLYDeskMic SA Server1 WideOrbit1 26 ZipOnePhonebook Returns a list of phonebook entries in a ZipOne Command GetList ZipOnePhonebook lt ZipOnelPAddress gt Example GetList ZipOnePhonebook 172 16 4 1 O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 234 Return O Software Authority Inc Columns Availability ID ID of the phonebook entry Name Name of the phonebook entry Group phonebook entry group Type phonebook entry type Combo combination field for use in stack event xml Example BeginList ziponephone
134. e GPI 2 OUT 2 Y gt l Input Closure f any eee eee a State low C High 1 Actions If Not Met 0 Delayed Actions If Not Met 0 Delay 5 seconds _ Move Up Move Down Cut Copy Paste Next double click on the route action and select the correct Router Source and Destination for the route which should be made Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 65 EN DemoEventGroup StackingEventEditor O x Name GPIDemoEvent Other Details a Description Qualifiers 1 Logic All v Actions If Met Details Open Palette Type GPistateChange GPIStateChange Actions If Met 2 Route Route SendEmail SendEmail Delayed Actions If Met 0 Delay 5 seconds gt Actions If Not Met 0 Delayed Actions If Not Met 0 Delay 5 seconds gt Move Up Move Down Cut Copy Paste HE DemoEventGroup StackingEventEditor Name GPIDemoEvent Other Details x E Description Qualifiers 1 Logic All v Actions If Met Details Open Palette v iption Name SendEmail opistateChange GPIStateChange Description To Jne mydomain com Actions If Met 2 Subject Somebody tripped my GPI 1 Route Route Uh oe SendEmail SendEmail i Just though you should know Delayed Actions If Met 0 Delay 5 seconds gt aj Actions If Not Met 0 Include Date Tme 7 Delayed Actions If Not Met 0 Delay Sseconds gt Click
135. e Prophet polls for the current state at a very high rate of speed The Sine Systems ACU 1 bridge for the protocol translator will intercept the polls and feed the correct state back without placing as high a load on the PathfinderPC Server application itself So in general if you are using Prophet and the SineSystems ACU 1 interface then the you should use the Software Authority ACU 1 Prophet Version Bridge Application from this appendix Otherwise you should use the SAPortRouter application described earlier in this document Serial communications present an interesting dilemma to a high availability environment Specifically a standard RS 232 port can not be split effectively Even if the two listening servers are clustered in a way such that only one has its serial port open at any given point in time as PathfinderPC Server can be set up to do creating an RS 232 splitter cable causes electrical problems that often causes communications problems in the RS 232 protocol As a result Software Authority has added two bridging applications to its software suite These applications take a serial port signal and convert it to TCP Furthermore the bridging application includes two TCP connections so it will attempt to connect to multiple servers in a cluster Controlling PC Controlling Application Serial Port 1 SA Bridge Application Serial Port 2 TCP To Server A TCP To Server B Connected Trying To Connect Null Modem Cable TCP Protocol Tran
136. e as E been chen de is 169 Setting Control Properties voii aa a 169 O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 6 PROPERTY DESCRIPTION iaa 174 Panel Properties aiii tddi idad a aan ai idas ci cis 174 Label Control Properties rare A A io 175 Button Control Properties ani e e 177 Meter Control Properties ii A A a OEE E EE 179 MeterFader Control Properties sis s seis cise cceseiseveciedssesnpsasasscnsigasvastacesedpesguabeptaseascnsigeatestasuseiseas uni SE EEE PESASSE ERSS EEES OSEERE SARER 180 WebBrowser Control Properties oops at iia iia 180 Clock Control Properties id id ia A dois 181 PATHEINDERPC MINI caca Aa ot 183 PATHFINDERPRO VMIX CONTROL o ccoccccococcocccnonoccononcnonocnonancnnnnrnnnnrnnnnn conan cnn nanrnn nn rro nn n nana mnnn nnn 184 CON EGTA I DA AE EEEE E EES E EE E E E E E E E E io 184 EAN NE E E E E A E E E E E en E A E E E E 184 TENNI eN B E N h O EE E EE EO EE E OE EEE REE RB RES 184 CONFIGURING VMIXCONTROL r a a a a a E EEE E E E EI SEE EEEE E ES SEESE NaS 185 USING VMEXCONTROL 5 rd rl r anoe ideana 188 Using a Fader a A a A e A a sa 189 SAPORTROUTER 20 AAA A A a AA 191 OSAAVAT A E EE A S E T ETE a te co o E telde de o tete TO 191 TEIGENSING ed es ee 191 INE A PP 191 CONFIGURING SAPORTR OUTER A e coo 192 Creating POTIS iuuniiin ide E Ea EEPE ESEE TOES PADET EES eaa oe rita odds 193 PORTES a EEIE S EN SE 193 Nell a E E EEE E E S O EAEE E EE EEEE E EE S E 193 EC AVA DIA ANETES EE AEA EA a bal 194 ILE LTA
137. e considered read only Whereas GPO pins and software GPI pins are read and write sinec they can be read and tripped R stands for Read B stands for both read and write And N stands for neither read or write There are several valid values you will see in these columns RIBO Input pins cannot be changed Read Only Output pins can be both read and written BIBO Input and Output pins can be both read and written NINO This will only appear for in the source column of a destination with no route Since their is no source you cannot read or write to the source Version This command displays the PathfinderPC Server version information Example gt gt Version PathfinderPC Server Pro Version 4 55 RC11 VMIXGain lt ElementIP gt lt SubmixerNumber gt lt ChannelNumber gt lt Gain gt Changes the gain on a VMIX Channel on an Element This is only valid for Axia Audio Routers at this point in time Example gt gt VMIXGain 172 16 1 60 1 5 0 0 OK gt gt VMIMOff lt ElementIP gt lt SubmixerNumber gt lt ChannelNumber gt Turns off a VMIX Channel on an Element This is only valid for Axia Audio Routers at this point in time Example gt gt VMIXOff 172 16 1 60 15 OK gt gt VMIXOn lt Element EngineIP gt lt SubmixerNumber gt lt ChannelNumber gt Turns on a VMIX Channel on an Element Engine This is only valid for Axia Audio Routers at this point in time Example gt gt VMIXOn 172 16 1 60 1 5 OK gt gt VMIX
138. e scene may be activated causing the routes to be taken by selecting that scene from the list under the scene menu item or using the drop down scene list of the route control panel Please note The scenes also store the state of the Lock point Thus a scene that makes routes and then locks them may be created Also if a scene is selected that uses points that are already locked the scene will not complete the locked routes and will issue a warning Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 154 Virtual Routers Virtual Routers are Routers that have points that correspond to points on other actual routers For example if a facility has a centralized Audio router with a variety of shared gear as well as points from a number of edit suites each individual suite may only want to see the routing points that are pertinent to that suite Rather than seeing a huge list of points that are rarely used a Virtual Router may be created which only contains the routing points on the main router that are most often used The full router may still be opened when needed but the virtual router would be used for everyday use This also allows an Administrator to limit a user to a specific set of route points Each point on a virtual router may also correspond to multiple points on different actual routers In this way a machine router may be created where Audio Video and Machine Control can be routed with one click To accomplish this a point
139. eate a custom group and include only the GPIO devices you wish to log in that group Then for the GPI log message select that custom group name from the drop down list instead of All or None To create a group from the log group editor Click Add in the editor and then edit the name of the group in the top box Select the items to include in the group from the list using the shift and control keys to select multiple lines if desired and then use the buttons to move the items in and out of the included list Then Apply the changes Please note that there are several types of groups that can be created depending on the log message type to which the group will be applied This is indicated by the Group Type Edit Groups column on the previous screen and the last part of the title bar of the group editor For example Router Device group types will allow you to create custom groups of router device objects On the other hand the Stack Event Group Type which you will find on O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 121 some of the Server Events log messages allows you to create custom groups of Stack events to log The kind of group you are editing in the group editor will define the items that can be included When you open the group editor from a Stack Event column type the options to include will not be router devices but stack events in the system These custom groups will then be available in the main Log Settings screen under the group a
140. en hard drives crash power supplies go up in smoke and employees make mistakes So this section is probably the most important section in this document Backup Backup Backup Once you have your system working and finely tuned it is critical to make a backup Microsoft as well as other backup manufacturers provide a number of tools for backing up your entire server But in addition to that PathfinderPC Server may be backed up by simply making a copy of the PathfinderServer folder This folder will be located either in C Program Files or C Program Files x86 depending on whether it is a 64 bit operating system Simply making a copy of that folder to another location will backup the critical data files necessary to restore your system on a different server It is also recommended that you make a backup of your system before making critical changes to your databases such as adding new equipment This will ensure that a mistake will not cause a loss of functionality So make a habit of backing up the PathfinderServer folder to a safe location regularly Additionally PathfinderPC Server makes its own backup copies of critical databases and files into its own backups folder whenever major changes are made to the system This allows databases to be recovered to a previous state if necessary However since these backup files are located in the same folder on the same drive as PathfinderServer it will not protect against hardware failure so regular backups a
141. ent ID 6014 Group Type Client Description A client application is attempting to delete a standard event OpenUserPanel Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 134 ID 6015 Group Type Client Description A client application is opening a user panel CloseUserPanel ID 6016 Group Type Client Description This message is not used at this point in time PanelActionCommand ID 6017 Group Type Client Description An action associated with a user panel is being run SoftwareUserPanelButtonPush ID 6018 Group Type Client Description A software user panel button is being pushed HardwareUserButton ID 6019 Group Type Client Description A hardware mapped user panel button is being pushed Log Message Custom Group Types None No custom group can be created for log messages with this group type The only available selections for messages with this group type are All and None Router Device Custom Groups can be created and will be comprised of router device objects On an Axia network this can be used to create a group of Axia nodes The log messages which use this group will then only occur if the particular devices in the group are involved in the particular log event Stack Event Custom groups of stack events can be created Stack event log messages that are associated with the named group will then only be logged if they involve the stack events selected
142. eports that the source no longer has the AES sync signal This qualifier will be analyzed any time the Axia device reports that the AES signal is lost or gained on the audio source This qualifier requires node software 2 6 12a or later and driver software 2 5 2 7 or later to function properly Negate will cause the qualifier to be True if the AES Sync is present Name AESSyncLoss wm O Negate E Router 1 DanAudio gt Source 41 PSIO 07 y gt Move Up Move Down Cut Copy Paste Mute on AES Sync Loss Axia audio devices which have AES ports have a property which defines whether the Livewire stream will be muted if AES Sync is lost This qualifier monitors the state of that property If the property is turned on this qualifier will evaluate as True otherwise it will evaluate as False Select the AES device from the list of available devices Only devices which have AES resources will be present in the list This qualifier will be analyzed any time the Axia device reports the Livewire Mute on AES Loss property is changed This qualifier requires node software 2 6 12a or later and driver software 2 5 2 7 or later to function properly Negate will cause the qualifier to be True if the parameter is not enabled in the device Name LWMuteOnAESLoss Negate E AES Device 172 16 1 55 PSIO 001 055 y gt Mute Disabled Enabled a Move Up Move Down Cut Copy Paste
143. er NIC will come back as local and the event system will not start Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 143 The hostnames must match in both cluster configuration files in order for clustering to synchronize properly The IP addresses in the cluster file configuration must match those on the local machine or the event system will not start even if the server is a stand alone server The cluster xml file can be recreated automatically by deleting it and then restarting the PathfinderPC Server application PathfinderPC Server will automatically synchronize all router databases including the router settings Events database Stack event database and protocol translator database between the 2 servers in the cluster Stack Events can only be edited on the server that owns the event system and the list of events may not display on the other server until it takes over the event system This is normal The synchronization happens automatically for any changes in any of these databases The one exception is that each server maintains its own connection to all Axia equipment and therefore maintains its own route status table but since both are getting this information from the same sources they will always be in sync In addition there are a couple of things that are not automatically synchronized and have to be manually copied and or setup between the servers at the time of this writing These are log settings and any custom scripts in
144. er to add a new qualifier EE DemoEventGroup StackingEventEditor Of x Name GPIDemoEvent Other Details x E Description Qualifiers 0 Logic All v Qualifier Details Open Palette y Name Type Description eee AA Description double click to add an item and close the palette Actions If Met 0 Hae Triggers from or makes a route Silence Detect Triggers from a specific length of silence on a given LW cha Audio Clipping Delayed Actions If Met 0 Delay ls seconds gt lt Triggers when clipping is detected on a given LW channel OM Level Present a Triggers when a specific level of audio is detected on a give Actions If Not Met 0 i i User Panel Button Triggers from or makes a change to a user panel button Delayed Actions If Not Met 0 Delay 5 seconds 2 time Range Triggers from a specific time and date or time and date range oe eee ml Move Up Move Down Cut Copy Paste Add Edt Remove O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 62 Drag the GPI qualifier to the qualifiers list and then click Add and select Action if Met to open the list of actions Or click Open palette and select actions EE DemoEventGroup StackingEventEditor Name GPIDemoEvet ti ststs lt i O O Other Details x Description o Qualifiers 1 Logic All x Actions If Met Details Open Palette v Name Description A Acti
145. er will have the Event Engine started at any point in time See the clustering section of this document for details StackEventEngineStarted ID 5004 Group Type None Description The Stack Event Engine has started In a cluster only one server in the cluster will have the Stack Event Engine started at any point in time See the clustering section of this document for details StackEventEngineStopped ID 5005 Group Type None Description The Stack Event Engine has stopped In a cluster only one server in the cluster will have the Event Engine started at any point in time See the clustering section of this document for details ClusterLostConnection ID 5006 Group Type None Description The cluster has lost its connection to the other server ClusterGainedConnection ID 5007 Group Type None Description The cluster has established its connection to the other server ClusterLicenseKeyFailure ID 5008 Group Type None Description There is an invalid licensing situation between the clustered servers Each Server in a cluster must have a unique license If both servers have the same license this log message will result and proper connection and synchronization will not take place Contact your reseller to purchase another copy of PathfinderPC Server Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 128 StackEventQualifiersAnalyzed ID 5009 Group Type Stack Event Description
146. ers and files listed above from the backup into the PathfinderServer folder on the new server to restore functionality You will also need to re enter the license information on the new computer when you first start PathfinderPC Server PathFinderPC PRO Server Version Upgrade When upgrading to a new version of PathfinderServer you can simply uninstall the old version and install the new one The uninstaller will not remove your data files Here is the recommended procedure for a standalone non clustered server e Choose a time where you can withstand a brief PathfinderPC server outage e Make a backup by making a copy of the PathfinderServer folder e Shut down the PathfinderPC Server application e From the Windows Control Panel choose Add Remove programs and double click PathfinderServer to start the uninstallation process Complete the uninstall e Launch the installer for the new version e Once complete start PathfinderPC Server again For a clustered server the steps are a little different While we try to maintain backwards compatibility whenever possible new versions sometimes require new data fields that have to be synchronized For this reason it is recommended to do upgrades in a way that does not allow mismtached versions of the server software to synchronize Here is the recommended procedure for upgrading the software on a cluster e Choose a time where you can withstand a brief PathfinderPC Server outage usually less than 2 minutes
147. erty is for future use and is not currently enabled Flash Will turn flashing on or off Flashing will cause the background color to switch back and forth between the BackgroundOn color and the BackgroundOff color Enabled Will make the button enabled or disabled for actual use in the panel MapRouter Specifies a router when mapping a route point to a button When the panel is running a mapped route point will turn the button on when the route exists and off when it does not And pressing the button will send a route change request to the equipment using the MapRouter MapSource and MapDestination fields All three of these fields must be entered for this to work properly MapSource Specifies a source when mapping a route point to a button When the panel is running a mapped route point will turn the button on when the route exists and off when it does not And pressing the button will send a route change request to the equipment using the MapRouter MapSource and MapDestination fields All three of these fields must be entered for this to work properly MapDestination Specifies a destination when mapping a route point to a button When the panel is running a mapped route point will turn the button on when the route exists and off when it does not And pressing the button will send a route change request to the equipment using the MapRouter MapSource and MapDestination fields All three of these fields must be e
148. erver9002 Description CP Server on 9002 TCP Port 9002 End Of Message Initialization Command The TCP Server opens a listening TCP connection on this machine on the specified port It will accept incoming connections on this port from as many TCP clients as you like and accept packets from them to forward to other ports to which this port is routed If you have multiple TCP clients connected to this port at the same time some care needs to be taken to make sure each packet is a complete command Otherwise if two clients try to send data at the same time it could get spliced in an unforgiving way The End Of Message field allows you to enter a command which is expected at the end of each message for the protocol that the port will be using This allows the application to wait until it has a complete message before sending it on to other ports to which this port is routed This leads to more efficient transmission You can enter non typable characters by using plus a 2 digit ascii hex code So 0D O0A is equivalent to a carriage return and line feed If you leave this blank data will be sent as soon as it is received which may be on a character by character basis The initialization command if present will be sent each time a client port connects Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 194 TCPClient EJ frmTCPClientConfig 1D Name MyClient8000 Description TCP Address 17216 1242 TCP Port 80
149. es or through console control stack event actions which allow you to load different source or show profiles Selecting the scene option changes the control panel to show a drop down list of scene changes which are available for the chosen router Any of these scenes may be selected and taken or scheduled In addition there are two other routing interfaces that may be selected depending on the user s preference For users that prefer the legacy mode of routing the route control toolbar may be closed When this toolbar is closed simply clicking on the line for the appropriate destination and then clicking on the correct source in the pop up list which will appear on the right makes the route Hitting escape closes the pop up list without making a change Destination a SAVIAO 1 a Studio_1 a Studio_4 af Studio_1 a Studio_1 Stuc a Studio_1 SAVIAO1 Studio_3 None a None None a None None a None a None a None a None a None Finally the user can select the Chart View under the view menu to produce a graphical grid view of the routing status _ AirChain_1 Airchain_2 O Airchain_s O sirchain_4 O sirchain_5 O sirchain_7 O sirchain_s O saviao 1 O saviao 2 O saviao 3 O saviao 4 O saviaos O saviaos O saviao7 O saviao s O saviao 9 O saviao 10 O saviao 1 O saviao 12 O Software Authority Inc Q Q Q o Q Q Q Q Q h ab 2 0 900 SAWIAO 1 ON SAVIAO gt Studio_1 ON
150. ethod by logging into the destination node and entering the IP Port of the source route Therefore Pathfinder PC Server routing exclusively uses the IP Port method of routing It is very important to understand that once PathfinderPC Server makes the change in the node it is not actively involved in the data flow of the GPIO changes In both the Audio and GPIO routing once PathfinderPC Server makes the routing change if you were to shut PathfinderPC Server down the audio and closures would still continue across the network with no interruption Pathfinder just tells the device what to listen to but the device and network handle the actual data transmission Finally Axia GPIOs are a little bit different than some other GPIOs In general Axia thinks of GPIs as signals going to the network and GPOs as signals coming from the network What is interesting about this is that in some cases it is possible to trigger GPIs If the GPIO device is a software device such as a Livewire Driver GPIs can be triggered by Pathfinder as well as GPOs This can come in useful For example we can have a Livewire Channel based route in place on a livewire driver GPIO port Then Pathfinder can trip the GPIs on that port to make things happen on the console In reality stack events can do many of these same things directly to the console more elegantly as described in the stack event section However certain automation systems that use Pathfinder s protocol translators and
151. exchanged between PathfinderPC Server and the bridge Finally be sure to set the Translator to start and stop with the event system This will ensure that only one server at a time in the cluster is processing commands When you have completed setting the serial port and TCP client settings in the Bridge application save your changes and watch the bridge start Be sure data is flowing through the data counters and the serial port is opening properly and the TCP connection is establishing a connection with the server that currently owns the event system The ACU Bridge also has a very useful additional screen available through the File Menu of the Bridge From the File Menu select View Status Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 244 ES VMIX ACU Status en Es 838 Optos 0000000000000 VMIX 2 en Esas 838 Optos 0000000000000 VMIX 3 sence Ba 838 Optos 0000000000000 VMIX 4 Mene 88888 Silence Alarms Optos 0000000000000 This screen shows the status of all VMIX channels GPIs GPOs and Silence Alarms that are being translated with the ACU 1 Translator The indicator dots will change color to display VMIX Channels that are on GPIs Optos that are Low GPOs Relays that are Low and silence alarm settings This display screen provides an intermediary step to show the states PathfinderPC Server is reporting These are the states that will be reported through the serial port to polling requests from the ACU
152. f the available memory slots have been utilized ReceivedProtocolTransCommand ID 5042 Group Type ProtocolTranslator Description Received data from a protocol translator MasterTinerFailed ID 5043 Group Type None Description Failure of the Master Timer Debug purposes VmixStateReceived ID 5044 Group Type None Description State message for a VMIX Resource has been received VmixStateChanged ID 5045 Group Type None Description Vmix resource state has changed O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 132 StackEventLoopInhibitor ID 5046 Group Type None Description The loop inhibitor has been triggered by an event SystemErrorTrap ID 5047 Group Type None Description Catchall for certain code functions to help identify a problem function in the code ProbelNakReceived ID 5048 Group Type None Description Probel Router protocol translator has received a Nak ClientEvents This section of events pertains to requests that a client application usually PathfinderPC Client or Mini makes of PathfinderPC Server RequestLogin ID 6001 Group Type Client Description A client application has sent a login request to PathfinderPC Server OpenRouter ID 6002 Group Type Client Description A Client application has opened the specified router CloseRouter ID 6003 Group Type Client Description A client app
153. f the router that will be used for this meter source or destination IO Number Defines the number of the source or destination to monitor MeterFader Control Properties MeterFader Controls are only available on panels that are connected to a PathfinderPro server license Type This defines the object type as MeterFader and cannot be changed by the designer Name Defines the name of the Meter control This name will be used to identify the control in stack events in the form PanelName ControlName Caption Sets the textual information to be displayed in the MeterFader Height The height of the control Change this parameter by right clicking on the control and resizing it or manually editing this property value Width Displays the width of the control Change this parameter by right clicking on the control and resizing it or manually editing this property value Top Displays the position of the top edge of the control on the panel Change this parameter by right clicking on the control dragging it to a new location or manually editing this property value Left Displays the position of the left edge of the control on the panel Change this parameter by right clicking on the control dragging it to a new location or manually editing this property value Source Dest Defines whether the IO this meter will be monitoring will be a source or a destination Router Number Defines number of the router t
154. f the value exists in any row under that column If it does the qualifier is True If it does not it is False Alternatively if you select a table column and row PathfinderPC Server will compare the value at the specified row and column with the defined value If they are equal the qualifier is True Otherwise it is False Negate reverses the qualifier state making the qualifier True if memory values do not match and or the matrix does not exist Negate E Table Name MyTable Value My Value 5 Value is in List Column No Change 23 s Table Column __ o Table Row po 034 Move Up Move Down Cut Copy Paste O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 84 Event Engine Start ana EventSystemStart This qualifier is only analyzed every time the T Description Stack Event System Starts up or shuts down It is considered True if the event engine is Negate B d ano Parsee tent This qualifier evaluates True or False based on whether the event system is running Negate reverses this state Move Up Move Down Cut Copy Paste Axia Console Profile Change Name ProfileChange This qualifier allows you to select a specific nae ae Axia Console and Profile on that Console in the Axia network If the specified profile is loaded Negate a theis the quals is consicsred to be bias If it Console 172 16 153 PowerSt 001 053
155. formatted as follows PortName lt PortNumber gt lt PortName gt lt Tab gt lt PortDescription gt Usage Syntax PortName Or PortName lt PortNumber gt gt gt PortName PortName TCPServer7000 TCP Port 7000 Server PortName 2 TCPServer9002 TCP Server on 9002 PortName 3 MyClient8000 PortName 4 Serial4 gt gt ActivateRoute Changes a port route gt gt ActivateRoute Change a particular Route Point Usage Syntax ActivateRoute lt DestinationNumber gt lt NewSourceNumber gt gt gt ActivateRoute 4 2 RouteStat 4 2 False Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 201 gt gt Vista Users Vista runs under a standard user rights system no matter what user is logged in However the service needs to run under Administrative privileges Therefore you may need to either run the installer for this application from a command prompt with Administrator privileges or disable UAC to install Then you can re enable when you are done To disable UAC goto the control panel click on User Account and click the link to turn UAC off You will be warned and asked to reboot the computer Then install SAPortRouter Then you can turn UAC back on again and reboot Additionally if you are running on Vista you will need to run the configuration application as Administrator as well To do this make a shortcut to the application on your desktop Right click on the shortcut and click properties Then click Advance
156. from high to low or low to high If the pin state matches the one selected in the qualifier the qualifier will be considered True If it does not it will considered False If a LWChannel number is present in the Channel field then the GPO must also be assigned that Livewire channel number in order for the qualifier to evaluate as True Name GPOStateChange Negate E Router 2 DanGPIO gt GPO 1 OUT 1 gt Output Closure 2 2 Is 4 State O No Change Low High i A y Channel Move Up Move Down Cut Copy Paste Negate reverses the qualifier state effectively reversing the State option O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 79 User Button Press The User button Qualifier allows a defined user button in a Panel created with the panel designer to act as a qualifier This qualifier will be analyzed both if the changes happen on the software panel button and if they happen on a hardware mapped hardware button To use this qualifier enter a button name in the Button Name field in the following format PanelName ButtonName The HostIP ButtonModule and ButtonNumber fields may be used instead of a Panel Designer button name to make this qualifier react to an Axia hardware User Panel or Accessory Panel button Enter the Host IP of the Element CPU or rack mount button panel hosting the button and select the module number and button number to use Next select the
157. g new IOs on existing equipment and for remembering memory slot states between restarts More detailed information on each menu item will be described later in this document Adding Editing Routers in the system In order to use the PathfinderPC system the PathfinderPC Server Administrator must add the routers to the system by defining the router model and communications settings With most of the routers PatfhfinderPC supports this is just a simple task of selecting the router model number from a drop down list and defining the serial port or TCP settings to communicate with the router This is true for the Z Systems Detanglers Videoquip DS1224 NTI VGA Router Sigma and Evertz routing equipment The Axia Livewire system however is different from most routers and requires a little more discussion The Axia Livewire routing system uses many devices spread across a facility and all interconnected through a standard Ethernet Switch network Thus when we discuss an Axia Livewire Router in PathfinderPC Server we are really talking about a network of Axia equipment that makes up a single logical router In most Axia networks there will usually be two main logical routers created within PathfinderPC Server One will encompass all of the audio points across the Axia Network and the other will encompass all of the GPIO points Obviously it is not possible to route a GPIO point to an Audio point so they are treated as two different routers within the sy
158. ges Off Negate will cause the qualifier to be True if any of the fader channel states are different from the ones selected in the qualifier Console options note some of these will only function with Element version 3 0 and or Fusion e Source profile Detect the load of a specific source profile e Program 1 through 4 Detects the PGM buss state on a fader e On Detects whether the fader is on or off e On Button Detects if the fader s on button is up or down e Off Button Detects if the fader s off button is up or down e Mute Detects if the fader is muted e Preview Detects if the fader s preview button has been pressed Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 87 e Talk to Studio Detects if the fader s Talk to Studio button has been pressed e Talk to Control Room Detects if the fader s Talk to Studio button has been pressed e Talkback Detect if the talkback is on or off e Soft A B Fusion Only Detect if the Fusion s A or B soft button is down up on or off e Monitor Section Control Room Mute Detect if the control room is muted e Monitor Section Control Room Dim Detect if the control room is dimmed e Monitor Section Studio Mute Detect if the studio is muted e Monitor Section Studio Dim Detect if the studio is dimmed e Monitor Section External Preview Detect if the external preview is on or off e Monitor Section Talk to external Detect if the talk to external is on or off e Mo
159. gt Finish x GPIO Events Like the Time Based Events there are two types of GPIO Events Route GPIO Scene Snapshot GPIO GPIO events are either individual routes or entire scene changes that are triggered by a change in a GPIO source contact closure Click Next A Event Wizard Select the Type of Event C Activate Route C Activate Scene Silence Detect Backup Route C GPIO Triggered Snapshot Cancel lt Back Next gt gt Finish xl Select the route point information or scene to change Click Next Select the Routing Details for this Event Router DanAudio Destination VMX 1 in1 y Override Locks Cancel lt lt Back Next gt gt Finish xi O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 52 Select the GPIO source contact closure and whether the change to high or low triggers the event Click Next MW Event Wizard Emish Finally enter a name and a description for the event Click Finish to add the event Event Wizard Next O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 53 Stacking Events The Stacking Event Engine in PathfinderPC Server is an exciting new technology that allows an Administrator to create highly customized events through a simple to use graphical interface It provides the power of a scripting language without the need to know
160. hat will be used for this meter source or destination IO Number Defines the number of the source or destination to monitor WebBrowser Control Properties Meters are only available on panels that are connected to a PathfinderPro server license Type This defines the object type as WebBrowser and cannot be changed by the designer Name Defines the name of the Web Browser control This name will be used to identify Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 180 the control in stack events in the form PanelName ControlName Caption Sets the textual information to be displayed in the WebBrowser This is not used at this point in time Height The height of the control Change this parameter by right clicking on the control and resizing it or manually editing this property value Width Displays the width of the control Change this parameter by right clicking on the control and resizing it or manually editing this property value Top Displays the position of the top edge of the control on the panel Change this parameter by right clicking on the control dragging it to a new location or manually editing this property value Left Displays the position of the left edge of the control on the panel Change this parameter by right clicking on the control dragging it to a new location or manually editing this property value
161. he HWMapAxiaSysName will automatically be filled in accordingly Meter Control Properties Meters are only available on panels that are connected to a PathfinderPro server license Type This defines the object type as Meter and cannot be changed by the designer Name Defines the name of the Meter control This name will be used to identify the control in stack events in the form PanelName ControlName Caption Sets the textual information to be displayed in the Meter This is not used at this Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 179 point in time Height The height of the control Change this parameter by right clicking on the control and resizing it or manually editing this property value Width Displays the width of the control Change this parameter by right clicking on the control and resizing it or manually editing this property value Top Displays the position of the top edge of the control on the panel Change this parameter by right clicking on the control dragging it to a new location or manually editing this property value Left Displays the position of the left edge of the control on the panel Change this parameter by right clicking on the control dragging it to a new location or manually editing this property value Source Dest Defines whether the IO this meter will be monitoring will be a source or a destination Router Number Defines number o
162. he Pathfinder Remote GPIO by Port and GPIO by Pin routers are both GPIO routers The purpose of these routers is to allow one Pathfinder server to address the GPIO ports owned by another Pathfinder server This allows GPIO routing over a WAN Before describing these routers it is important to understand some concepts about Axia GPIO ports If you have not read the section entitled Axia GPIO Concepts at the end of the section on Axia Audio and GPIO routers please do so as the next several paragraphs will build on that knowledge The main purpose of these routers is for setting up multi city GPIO networks First it is important to note that it is possible to set up a multi city GPIO network without the use of Pathfinder Remote routers As long as a GPIO node in one city has TCP access to a GPIO node in another city you simply need to create a standard Axia GPIO router as described above and you can route closures from one to the other In order to do this you may have to manually add the devices into the Axia GPIO Router as multicast discovery traffic may not be in place between the cities This is extremely elegant but it also has a downside All of the GPIO nodes in City A need IP access to all of the GPIO node in City B If there is a private network that allows this between the cities then a standard Axia GPIO router is the way to go However if the network between the sites uses the public Internet or a less secure network opening up connections to a
163. he Primary PathfinderPC Server at the remote site and the IP Cancel address of Secondary PathfinderPC Server at the remote site Then it 172 16 16 1 x Enter the address of a backup clustered PFSServer for ox this site _Cancel_ fi 72 16 1 254 will ask for the user name and password to use to login to those servers Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 31 PathFinderServer x Enter the user name to access the PFS Server Lox _Cancel_ Admin Enter the password to access the PFS Server Lo _Cancel_ Pam x After the connection data is entered MN PFS Remote Setup Wizard ele the wizard will query the servers for a the GPIO ports pins that it has EL 172 16 1 254 available and present them in the EL DanGPIo E EL Destinations GPO HL Sources GPI E 172 16 16 1 EC DanGPIO mC Destinations GPO EC Sources GPI selection window Continue clicking the Add PFS Server until all sites are added to the window o 1 OUT 1 OUT 1 ON Element 001 05 oL 2 OUT2 OUT 2 ON Element 001 05 003 OUT3 OUT 3 ON Element 001 05 OUT 4 ON Element 001 05 oO 4 OUT 4 ti Minimum Pulse Length Add PFS Foo Server Cancel lt lt Back Next gt gt Finish Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 32 Next select the GPIO ports or pins using the checkboxes from the list from the multiple sites which you wa
164. he TCP and UDP ports send data in the standard syslog format The File based option is similar but contains some additional information for each log message and therefore does not strictly adhere to the syslog format Let s look at the format of the log messages in both the text files and the TCP UDP syslog format First we will look at the text files created by the PathfinderPC Server log system Each log message is posted to a single line within the text file and is made up of the following columns of information separated by tabs MillisecondCounter Date of Message Time of Message ServerIPAddress Message Severity Message ID Number Message Source Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 117 Remote Device Message Data Let s look at each of these columns in detail Millisecond Counter The Millisecond counter shows the result of a call to the operating system which returns the time in milliseconds since the machine has been booted Because of the variable in the operating system used to hold this value it will sometimes return a negative value but it can be used to get more accurate differences in time between events Date of Message Date the message was generated Time of Message Time the message was generated ServerIPAddress The IP address of the PathfinderPC server which generated the message Message Severity A number from 0 to 7 representing the severity of the message 0 Emergency 1 Alert 2
165. he port requires a Login and whether it is always enabled or only enabled on the server that owns the event system in a cluster Ed Master TCP Socket Sett E Port for Client Connections PFClient and Mini 5200 Client Socket Open Delay after Event System Start 5 Seconds Main S Protocol Port 9500 e Main SA Protocol Port always enabled Main SA Protocol Port follows event engine Status Priority High v Main SA Protocol Port Requires Login Apply Cancel It is important to note that changing the Main SAProtocol Port may necessitate making changes in the stack event editor and or GPIO by port and by pin routers as well since they use this port for communications The Client Socket Delay allows an Administrator to delay allowing PathfinderPC Client and Mni connections after the event system starts In systems that have large numbers of stack events thismay be desirable as it allows the system to have time to load those events before it begins handling client connections The Status priority defines whether route and gpio changes are sent out the Main SA protocol port immediately High or whether they are placed in a queue to be sent slightly later Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 39 Name Description a User Database and Password Mode gt Admin Default Administrator Accoun The User database may be edited by selecting it from the File Menu of
166. he state usually online or offline of a specific device has changed XIUDPStreamLoss ID 3006 Group Type RouterDevice Description An XIUDP Router IO has lost its stream ServerActionSent This section of log events will log commands that are sent by PathfinderPC Server RouteChangeRequest ID 4001 Group Type RouterDevice Description PathfinderPC Server is sending a route change request to a device GainChangeRequest ID 4002 Group Type RouterDevice Description PathfinderPC Server is sending a gain change request to a device GPIChange ID 4003 Group Type RouterDevice Description A Request to change a GPI is being sent by PathfinderPC Server The only GPIs that PathfinderPC can change are driver GPIs GPOChange ID 4004 Group Type RouterDevice Description A request to change a GPO is being sent by PathfinderPC Server GPIStatusRequest O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 125 ID 4005 Group Type RouterDevice Description PathfinderPC Server is asking for the current status of GPIs on a specific device Use with caution as this will log any polling requests as well GPOStatusRequest ID 4006 Group Type RouterDevice Description PathfinderPC Server is asking for the current status of GPOs on a specific device Use with caution as this will log any polling requests as well GPISubscription ID 4007 Group Type RouterDevice
167. he system will automatically switch to the backup source which may be owned by a totally different Axia device Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 49 To set up an Audio Based event Click Add Event Select Silence Detect Backup Route Then click Next MM Event Wizard x Select the Type of Event C Activate Route Activate Scene Pe GPIO Triggered Snapshot Cancel Back Next gt gt Finish Next enter the Router Source and Destination points for both the Primary and Backup route While any drop down box is open you can click on the grey header bar within the drop down window to make the description field visible or hide it This is often useful to find the source or destination you want in a large list Also select Override locks if the route should be made regardless of the lock state of points involved Click Next again Select the Routing Details for this Event Router DanAudio gt Primary Route Destination Destination Sidi Source Pomi a Backup Route Destination PESTEN v E Source E Override Locks xi Cancel lt lt Back Next gt gt Einish O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 50 Select the amount of time in seconds X Event Wizard that the audio should be missing before switching to the backup route Also select GPIO alarm settings if desired as described below Click Next fo 2
168. ice that once you make your selection and then leave the selection field the options in the HWMap section will change depending on whether a GPIO option or User Panel option was selected Next under HWMapHostIP enter the IP address of the Element CPU or GPIO box that hosts the hardware device to be used The HWMapHostPort will have already been selected when the HWMapType was selected and should not be casually changed The HWMapInternalName Property is also automatically defined and matches the software PanelName ControlName to which you are mapping The HWMapAxiaSysName is automatically defined by the last two properties on the list and cannot be manually set If you have selected a GPIO type map then these last two properties will be GPIO Port and GPIO Circuit Enter the number of the port on the device defined by the HWMapHostIP and the GPI GPO pin to use If the HWMapType is a UserPanel Button or Label LCD Display then these properties will be UserPanelModule and UserPanelButton The module number is related to the dip switch setting on the bottom of the module in the console However there is a much simpler method for obtaining the module number if you don t know it From the PathfinderPC Server PC open a command prompt and type telnet ipaddress 4010 example Telnet 172 16 1 3 4010 For the IP address use the ipaddress of the Element CPU that hosts the user module Then press a few buttons on the module You should see commands coming ba
169. ick on the main form of the newly created user panel you will see a list of 10 properties in the right hand column If you grab the corner of the new user panel and drag to adjust the height and width of the form you will notice that the height and width properties change to show the size of the form Also if you double click in the caption property field and change the caption it will change the caption at the top of the form Each object has its own set of properties that do things within the system The last part of this section will list all of their properties and their uses within the system To continue with our first panel example drag and drop a button control onto the panel Next Right click on the button and resize it to the desired size Once you have gotten the button to the correct size click somewhere else on the user panel to exit the resizing and moving mode Then click on the button again to select it Next with the button selected double click on the caption property and change the caption for the button This will alter what the button says You can also click in the BackColorOn and BackColorOff properties and then click on the button that appears in the property bar to open a color palette This will allow you to define the O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 169 colors to be used when the button is on or off The button will change colors to the new color if you are changing the backcolor that matches the Sta
170. ifiers on startup L Actions If Met 1 Milisecond delay 5 seconds gt Delayed Actions If Met 0 Re evaluate qualifiers before executing delayed actions if met E Actions If Not Met 1 Milisecond delay 5 seconds gt Delayed Actions If Not Met 0 Re evaluate qualifiers before executing delayed actions if not met E Advanced The Name and Description fields allow you to name and describe the stack event group The drop down arrow in the right corner provides access to information about when the event group was last modified and allows you to enable or disable the entire group This is also available in the main page of the server The list on the left hand side of the screen shows all of the stack events in your event group In the example above there is only one event called Default Clicking on that event will fill the Data list on the right hand side with data and properties about the event as described below Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 55 Name Field to enter the name of the event Each Event must have a unique name within the group Description Field to enter the description of the event Enabled Select whether the event is enabled to run Last Modified Displays the date and time the event was last modified Qualifiers Displays the number of qualifiers in the event Evaluate qualifiers on startup Select whether the event should run the Actions if met or not met ba
171. iggers when clipping is detected on a given LW channel Q Clipping 18 StackEventChildFields Returns a list of fields used for a single qualifier or action This command is designed for and used by the stack event editor application Command GetList StackEventChildren lt Child Field ID gt Example GetList StackEventChildFields 1 Return Columns Availability Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 230 ID StackEventChildField ID from the StackEventChildren command above Name The name of the qualifier or action property Description The description of the qualifier or action property Type Q A or B for Qualifier Action or Both XMLName The name of the XML element which will be used to store the qualifier or action property Value the getlist or value list that will be used to populate the available options for this property Func whether functions are allowed on this property Excl make this field unavailable if the field ID listed in this exclusions column is filled Rely make this field only available if the field ID listed in this relies column is filled Example BeginList StackEventChildFields 2 2011 01 25 _09 19 02_001 Avail ID Name Description Type XMLName Value Func Excl Rely O 1 Router Select Router Q Router lt Routers Metered ID gt False O 2 Source Select Source Q Source lt SourceDetails ID gt False 3 1 19 VMIXChannels Returns a list of VMIXChannels available on a spe
172. in 4 No Change Audio Transmit Mode Y No Change Move Up Move Down E Paste O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 107 IPort Control This action allows you to make changes to the Iport encoder and decoders For additional details regarding these parameters refer to the Iport manual Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 108 Protocol Translators Protocol Translators allow the server to communicate with other controllers as 1f it were a specific type of router Essentially it allows PathfinderPC Server to pretend to be some other manufacturer s router as far as a controlling device is concerned The PathfinderPC Server Protocol Translator Engine translates commands from one type of router protocol to the routers which are set up on the system Create a protocol translator by clicking on the Protocol Translator tab and clicking Add Translator Select the protocol to use for the e Protocol Translator Setup loj x translation Select a Protocol to use Protocol Software Authority Protocol Click next lt Back Einish Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 109 38 Protocol Translator Setup Decide how the communication will take place serial port TCP or UDP connection and enter the appropriate settings
173. in the clustering tab will allow you to Add another PathfinderPC Server to the cluster Enter the host name of the other server and the IP addresses of the other server to be used for clustering communications and client access La Cluster Host HostName ServerB IP Addresses to be used for Clustering Communications IPAddress 172 16 1 4 5300 IPAddress Port OK Cancel It is important that the hostnames entered match correctly between the two servers In addition it is recommended to add the Axia network as a final last path for clustering communications if all else fails Select OK when you are done entering the server information for the other server You will then be prompted with a message asking if the local machine has the accurate configuration files This question determines whether the configuration will get pulled from the remote machine or whether the remote machine when it is set up will pull the initial router configuration from this one You will now see icons for the new server in this cluster tab Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 140 ra PathFinderServer SAVIAO BAX File View Preferences Help Routers Events Stacking Events Protocol Translator Clustering Cluster Hosts E JEA SAVIO Local Listening DPF Clients Connected Ea Clustering Addresses E 1921681 10 08 1721613 O i Event System Off 4 ServerB Connecting 0 PF Clients Connected E Ea Clustering
174. in the group Event Custom groups of events can be created Event log messages that are associated with the named group will then only be logged if they involve the stack events selected in the group Protocol Translator Custom groups of Protocol Translators that exist on the server can be created Log messages that are associated with the named group will then only be logged if they involve the Protocol Translators selected in the group Client Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 135 This group allows you to select hardware mapped clients and create IP addresses for other clients and add those to a custom group The log messages associated with these custom groups will only be logged if the event involves the selected clients O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 136 Clustering Almost all mission critical operations require redundancy to ensure additional reliability and guaranteed up time Equipment can break hard drives can fail and unforeseen human factors can also play roles in system outages Thus it is always important to analyze your system for possible failures and attempt to isolate and mitigate the affects of those failures To help in this process PathfinderPC includes a clustering option PathfinderPC Clustering allows the PathfinderPC Server software to run on two servers Only clusters of two servers are supported at this time The servers are made aware of each other and will synchroni
175. ing System Routers may be added or removed from the server using the buttons on the main screen The Edit Router button allows the Administrator to edit the communication parameters for the router whereas the Route Names button allows the user to edit the names of the individual routes within each router in the system The events tab provides access to the event system to add and remove system events The Stacking Events tab provides access to the Stacking Events Engine to create custom user defined events The Protocol Translator tab lists the protocol translators that are active on the system and what form of communication PathfinderPC Server will use Serial or TCP IP to answer automation requests under a given protocol The Panels tab lists user panels created with Panel Designer which the server will serve out to PathfinderPC Client and Mini The Logs tab provides access to log PathfinderPC Server log files Finally the clustering tab shows the list of active PatfhinderPC Server computers involved in the cluster Each of these tabs will be discussed in greater detail throughout this document Under the File Menu an Administator can control several options The Master TCP Socket settings allow the system Administrator to define certain communication port parameters Itis highly recommended that these settings be left in their default state unless there is a specific reason to change them The File menu also provides access to the User Database Users an
176. ip One Control 2 A AE di E ah es a Ry 9 TP OVE Controla asii 92 STAGCKEVENT ACTIONS oreen aiee aeaee aneo E aA oane Eae T apee aN hA N Dae lead ies idilio ita 93 Activate Rotera einne aaa EE N ER E E ETET EAEE A E EEEE NEA O EEE E yada Ga dh E E aE e 93 Activate Scene di A nai Nde aaae a Ta eiaa Nro Eaei 93 GPT State Chan ge noia di e R E a dase ascii 94 GPO State Changed A ay 94 Us r Button Property outlet R tae de td a da da de tdi ios 95 Send Email iii ii A A AAA A A AA And 96 RUnSCPl iia ii 96 Protocol Translator Command siei esna a Pa aaa tk LIRIOS t 97 Memory AE Dis SEREA E noes 98 Memory Matri List iia iii peca adds oaannicst pisa 99 RUSA COMMING a a aia aaa inc 100 Axia Console Profile Change io ii e a A a dd is Eei 100 VMIX Changes anrora a e dt a ie Betas A a AE Ghee Besse Si 101 Exec te Shell Command isisisi anie iK eie a e e a aai ea r ee o e e aK a iaei e a Ei ae 101 Axia Console CHANGE A aa e eE E a E EE EE EEEE RO 102 Audio PlaybDdck RE EEEE E EET EE EEEE E stg age evanpes desea sesy o eee 103 Generate Log Message nren orria r E sevens 13 E EEV E TERE EEE EEE E ES IOa ev NEE da EEEE EEE KS codons NEEE 104 Gai Change sen AA AA aoe 105 EW Mitte ON AES LOSS ia ita a ES 106 Zip ONG CONLTOL hi 8 GR Gs BSE A a Asc Bae ee ey 107 IPort Control WA ae Bie eee a eee ees Beh Hae We ONS ike 108 PROTOCOL TRANSLATORS osa a ib 109 SUPPORTED TRANSLATORS vor coves veins sapseses cossdsts sopnaossesseees sbeheaes ES REEE EEA E Eaa E EEES T
177. is created on a virtual router for a machine i e Digital Beta Video deck This point contains the correct routing point information for the actual audio router video router and machine control routers Virtual routers may be created and edited either from the server software or the client software To create a virtual router in the server software simply add a new router and make the Router Model Type Virtual Then when the Edit Routes button is selected the Edit Virtual Router Window appears In the PathFinderPC Client Software Virtual Routers may be created by using the Create Virtual Router and Edit Virtual Router menu items under the Routers Menu This will also display the Edit Virtual Router Window Once a Virtual Router has been created it may be edited from either the Client or Server software but it may only be completely deleted from the server software O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 155 Uea P Edit Virtual Router Ea ES nee Sources Machine Outputs Destinations Machine Inputs Sources Machine Outs Description Destinations Machine Ins Description CD14 CD 1 ON DanLive At DST 1 DST 1 ON DanLive4 CD 2 ON DanLive4L DST 2 ON DanLive SRC 3 ON DanLive DST 3 ON DanLive SRC 4 ON DanLive DST 4 ON DanLive4 SRC 5 ON DanLive4 DST 5 ON DanLive4 SRC 6 ON DanLive2 DST 6 ON DanLive4 SRC 7 ON DanLive2 DST 7 ON DanLive CD 1 ON DanLive AL DST 1 ON DanLive4 1 2 3 4 6 7 3 co DD
178. is designed to be a simple to use text protocol for controlling PathfinderPC Server functions It can be used both for third party control applications and as a simple way to type commands to the system for remote control or debugging purposes Each command in the protocol must be terminated with a carriage return and line feed This means if you are trying to use Hyperterminal to connect to the server you need to turn on the Send Line Ends with Line Feeds option Telnet sessions in a Windows terminal window do this by default Command List Client to PathfinderPC Server lt Command gt The returns the list of commands or help for a specified command If no command is specified this returns the list of available commands Until the user is successfully logged in the only available command will be Login Example gt gt ActivateRoute ActivateScene ActivateSnap DeleteMemorySlot DestNames Echo EventEngineStatus Exit GetBufferSizes GetList GetListVersion GetMemorySlot GetSourceAddress GPIStat GPOStat LEcho Login Logoff Quit RouterNames RouteStat RunScript SetLock SetMemorySlot ShowStackKeys ShowSubscriptions Snapshots SourceNames StackDestTimerCount StackEngine StackEvents StackSourceTimerCount Subscribe Syntax TriggerAllDestGPI TriggerAllDestGPO TriggerGPI TriggerGPO Unsubscribe Verbose Version VMIXGain VMIXOff VMIXOn VMIXState VMIXTimeDown VMIXTimeUp Type Help and the name of the command for
179. is not functionally important other than to make a large group of events easier to view for the person editing the events Events can also be copied quickly by dragging the event to be copied into a blank place in the stack event list The Advanced Button opens up Loop Inhibitor settings on whichever stack event is selected The loop inhibitor is a technology that attempts to detect an event which is misbehaving For example if an event is created that switches something back and forth as fast as it can in an endless loop this has the potential to negatively impact the server s performance since the CPU will be using all its resources trying to satisfy this endlessly looping logic The Stack event loop inhibitor tries to detect and disable an event that is misbehaving in this manner to protect the rest of the application s performance It does this by keeping track of how frequently the event s actions are being executed By default any event that executes its actions more frequently that 10 times in 100 milliseconds will be disabled by the loop inhibitor The event will be flagged in red in both the editor and the Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 56 main PathfinderServer window so that the Administrator knows that the event has been disabled by the loop inhibitor The Advanced button allows the Administrator to alter the loop inhibitor settings for a specific event if necessary There might be a rare situation where the Adm
180. jected a login request RouterDeviceReceivedCommand Section The RouterDeviceReceivedCommand Section of log messages logs commands that are received from the external equipment This section should be used with caution and is generally used for debugging purposes only This is because this section logs all return communications from the external equipment including the responses to polling data While PathfinderPC Server relies primarily on event driven commands from such gear as the Axia nodes it does also send some polling requests both as a heartbeat to make sure the gear is still responding properly and to double check that no changes have been missed The return from these commands will get reported in this log section and so on a busy network there will be a huge amount of traffic through this section of logs and it can even slow the server response time down So this section is used more for debugging than daily use If you want to log when routes and GPIOs change which is a good idea it is better to accomplish this through the RouterEvents section as that section only writes log entries when one of the statuses changes rather than noting every communication response Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 123 RouteState ID 2001 Group Type RouterDevice Description Logs each command from a device that has to do with the state of the device s routing table Silence Threshold ID 2002 Group Type Ro
181. l automatically display the Main Server Control Panel and start the Add Router wizard PF piense Note The server computer must have the appropriate hardware connections to communicate with all routers which are to be used in the system For example if the routers are to be controlled serially the computer must have a serial port for each router to be controlled Furthermore the port must have the correct protocol Both the Z Systems Detangler and the VideoQuip routers for example require RS422 control Most PCs have RS232 ports thus an RS232 to RS422 adapter is required The Axia line of products uses Ethernet connections and therefore the Ethernet connection must have access to the logical LAN on which the Axia products are installed Feel free to contact Software Authority or Axia technical support for advice on products to accomplish these goals PathfinderPC Pro Licensing When you first launch PathfinderPC Server a license window will appear At the top of the license window is a link which will take you to the Pathfinder licensing site If you have not created an account click the create account button on the web page and use your request code included with your purchase to generate an account Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 16 and the correct license key Then copy and paste the request code and license key into the software Your copy of PathfinderPC Server will then be active Backups Things happ
182. l be made Router 1 DanAudio X gt regardless of whether the destinations involved Pa z are locked or not If the Lock Override is not z y _E checked only those routes in the scene whose Overide Locks destinations are not locked will be made Move Up Move Down Cut Copy Paste Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 93 GPI State Change This action will change the state of a GPI or GPO pin Please note that the only GPIs that can be changed by PathfinderPC Server are software GPIs such as are in the driver or the ASI card All GPOs on an Axia network can be changed however See GPO State change below Select the GPIO router and the GPI Source Port to be changed Then select the Pin and State to which it should be changed If it is to be a constant change leave the pulse length at O If the change is to be a pulse that then returns to the original state enter the pulse length in milliseconds in the Pulse field Name GPIStateChange Router 2 DanGPIO y r GPI 1 0UT 1 1 pa Closure 2 0O87 Low High a oH State Pulse Length Move Up Move Down Cut GPO State Change This action will change the state of a GPO pin Select the GPIO and the GPO Destination Port to be changed Then select the Pin and State to which it should be changed If it is to be a constant change leave the pulse router length at 0 If the change is to be a pulse that then retur
183. l router Go to the section on Virtual Routers in the PathfinderPC Client section to learn how to then import and edit virtual route points The interface for doing this is identical to the one in the client application Virtual Routers are the only type of router in the system that may be created and or edited from both the server application and the client application Editing Route Point Names To edit the names of source 101 xl File View Preferences Help and destination points in the Routers Events Stacking Events Protocol Translator Panels Logs Clustering PathfinderPC system from TT E a 2 DanGPIO the routers tab gt 3 Danvirtual Select the router in the list and then click the Route Names button Source and Destination names and descriptions can be edited by clicking on the particular name or description and simply editing the text Click Done when you are finished with all changes On an Axia router these names are actually retrieved from the Axia equipment itself and changing the names in this table will push the new names out to the Axia equipment when you click done This provides an easy place to O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 37 modify source and destination names for all of your Axia equipment throughout the network SHOBOX 02 08 SHOBOX 02 08 Ol Channel1 LM a Routers Channel1 ON Pow SHO
184. lControls DanPanel Button Return Columns Availability ControlName ControlType Example BeginList PanelControls Button 2007 07 14_13 15 22_001 Avail ControlName ControlType 0 DanPanel DanButton Button 0 DanPanel HeadLabel Label EndList 11 SourceAddresses Returns the list of source names in a router in the system Aliases sourceadd srcadd sa Command GetList SourceAddress lt RouterNumber gt lt SourceNumber gt If SourceNumber is blank returns all Addresses for the Router Example GetList SourceAddress 1 Return Columns Availability ID Pathfinder ID Location For Virtual Routers this will contain the Source s mapping to base routers For Axia Routers this will contain the IP Address of the host device and a slash with the port number 172 16 1 3 5 For all other Routers this will be empty StreamAddress For Axia Audio Routers this will contain the multicast stream address for the Source For all others this will be blank Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 226 ChannelNumber For Axia Audio Routers this will contain the Channel number derived from the stream address for the source For all others this will be blank Example BeginList SourceAddress 1 2007 07 14 13 15 22 001 Avail ID Location StreamAddress ChannelNumber 0 1 127 16 1 3 1 239 192 0 1 1 0 2 127 16 1 3 2 239 192 0 2 2 EndList 12 DestinationAddresses Returns the list of Destination name
185. lar to the talkback example above except this time we want it to switch to talkback when you press the button the first time and switch back to program content when you press it a second time In this case we are going to outline the logic on paper first as we did in the endless loop example to make sure we get it correct To create our latching talkback button we need something to keep track of the state of the button and since the button has a state option we can use that Again in this example Source 1 is program material and Source 2 is the talkback source Destination 1 is our headphone destination This first outline we will present should not actually be used It is a bad event but will teach a great deal about how stack events work StackEvent A Qualifiers User Panel Button DemoPanel DemoButton ButtonDown State Off Action ActivateRoute Route Source 2 to Destination 1 User Panel Button Set DemoPanel DemoButton State to On Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 73 While at first glance this logic looks correct in actuality it will create an endless loop for as long as the button is held down This is because as soon as any item involved in the qualifier list is changed for an event the event is analyzed Thus in EventA the button is pushed down when its state is off The Action sets the State to On and makes the route As soon as the state is set to On the button is still down because the computer is much faste
186. larm attached to the IO this command will not add one Example gt gt Subscribe Memory Subscribed to Memory Slot Changes Syntax This command returns the proper syntax for GetListCommands It s designed to be used by the new stack event editor to obtain lists of devices and objects as they get created and added to the system It is a command which described the parameters needed by certain GetList commands so that an outside application can discover and use GetList commands dynamically Contact Software Authority if you need more information on this command Example gt gt Syntax GetList SourceNames BeginSyntax GetList SourceNames GetList SourceNames lt Routers ID gt EndSyntax gt gt Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 214 TriggerAllDestGPI lt RouterNumber gt lt SourceNumber gt lt State llllllhhhhhlihhxxx gt lt PulseDuration in Milliseconds gt Trigger GPI contact closures on a GPIO Router or virtual router with GPI mappings GPIs can only be triggered on Axia Drivers Hardware equipment will be unaffected Given a source it will trip the closure on all GPI destinations the source is routed to Duration is optional and will cause a pulse in milliseconds rather than a steady state change The State is a list of the pins to set to high or low on the port Any pins with are set to high and any pins with h are set to low Pins with x are unaltered Therefore llxxh would set pins 1 and 2 to low 3
187. lect Installation Folder The installer will install SAPortRouterService to the following folder To install in this folder click Next To install to a different folder enter it below or click Browse Folder C Program Files Software AuthoritySSAPortRouterService s Install SAPortRouterService for yourself orfor anyone who uses this computer Everyone Just me Continue to Click Next and Finish until the application is installed Configuring SAPortRouter To Configure SAPortRouter Run the SAPortRouterConfig application Vista users will need to set the Serial PTCP SERVER P TCP CLIENT PGPIO PORT Pim TRASH Automatically Create Reverse Route Control Port 11045 Commit Changes Cancel All Changes SA Port Router Service State MINIMA If a licensing window appears enter your PathfinderPro Request code and license Key O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 192 Creating Ports To add ports drag the purple button for the type of port you want to create into the grid at the top of the screen This will cause a configuration window to appear where you can enter the setting information for the port To delete a port drag it from the grid to the trash To edit a port that has been created double click on it in the grid When you are done with the configuration be sure to click on the Commit button to commit the changes Then use the Start Stop button to res
188. lication has closed the specified router RequestRouteChange ID 6004 Group Type Client Description A client application is requesting a route change RequestLockChange ID 6005 Group Type Client Description A client application is requesting a lock for a particular destination on a router AddSceneChange Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 133 ID 6006 Group Type Client Description A client application is attempting to add a scene to the system or update an existing scene in the system DeleteSceneChange ID 6007 Group Type Client Description A client application is attempting to delete a scene from the system ActivateScene ID 6008 Group Type Client Description A client application has asked to activate a specific scene Create_UpdateVirtualRouter ID 6009 Group Type Client Description A client application is attempting to add a virtual router to the system OpenMeter ID 6010 Group Type Client Description A client application has opened detailed meters CloseMeter ID 6011 Group Type Client Description This log message is not used at this point in time ChangeGain ID 6012 Group Type Client Description A client application has requested a gain change Add_UpdateEvent ID 6013 Group Type Client Description A client application is attempting to add or update a standard event DeleteEv
189. ll of those devices and the Axia internal networks themselves is not advisable The Pathfinder GPIO By Port and By Pin routers strive to address this problem In these routers you set a PathfinderPC Server up to monitor and talk to other PathfinderPC Servers It then builds a list of all the GPIOs at the various sites and forwards closures between the servers using a single port to each server An example will probably make this design more clear Station conglomerate StationsRUs wants to send GPIO closures between City A B and C This allows them to send ID breaks and other signals from City to City during shows They set up a PathfinderPC Server and create a Pathfinder Remote GPIO by port router During the creation process they enter the IP address of the PathfinderPC Server located at each of the cities A B and C The router creation wizard then contacts the PathfinderPC Server at each site over the Pathfinder Control port port 9500 and requests the list of all GPIO ports each server has The administrator setting up the shared router then selects the ports from each city that should be involved in the router and finishes creating the router Once the router is created the server and or server cluster for redundancy hosting the router maintains a connection to the PathfinderPC Servers in City A B and C A user can make route changes on this central router to route a port from City A to City B and C When a closure happens at City A the
190. lost RouterNames Returns Names of all Routers in the system using the following format Begin RouterNames lt NUM1 gt Namel lt NUM2 gt Name2 lt NUM3 gt Name3 O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 209 End RouterNames Example gt gt RouterNames Begin RouterNames 1 DanNonTerm 2 TestGPIO 3 Dan_Virtual 4 DanTestRouter 5 OffsetLockTest 6 Test256SA Port 9BT_A 10BT_B End RouterNames gt RouteStat lt RouterNumber gt lt DestNum Null gt Returns the status of a single route point in a router or all route points in a router If nothing is sent in the RouteStat Dest Field the command returns the status of all points The response listed below is also sent whenever a route point changes to show the change in status RouteStat lt RouterNum gt lt DestNum gt lt SourceNum gt lt Lock True or False gt RouteStat lt RouterNum gt lt DestNum gt lt SourceNum gt lt Lock True or False gt RouteStat lt RouterNum gt lt DestNum gt lt SourceNum gt lt Lock True or False gt RouteStat lt RouterNum gt lt DestNum gt lt SourceNum gt lt Lock True or False gt Example gt gt RouteStat 1 RouteStat 1 1 9 False RouteStat 1 2 25 False RouteStat 1 3 62 False RouteStat 1 4 204 False RouteStat 1 5 16 False RouteStat 1 6 41 False RouteStat 1 7 50 False RouteStat 1 8 11 False RouteStat 1 9 1 False gt gt RunScript lt ScriptName gt lt CallingControlName gt lt CommandLineParameters gt
191. lt lt Back Finish Cancel Next gt gt Verify that the number of sources and destinations is correct for the given router Click Next again A NTI Veemux VGA Router Wizard xj Enter the Specific Number of Points on the Router Source Coordinates 16 Destination Coordinates 16 Finish Finally click Finish to add the router into the system xi All Information has been collected for this Router Click Finish to Complete the Changes Next gt gt Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 36 Gateway Router This router is no longer officially supported Its original purpose was to tie routers of different types together with wired gateways where PathfinderPC would use and clear the gateways dynamically Contact Software Authority for details if this is necessary Virtual Routers The Virtual Router Model is a unique model It allows subsets and supersets of real routers to be created This will be discussed in detail in the PathfinderPC client section of this document The Virtual router is the only router that may be created and edited using the PathFinderPC Client software All real routers should be defined within the server first To create a Virtual Router Click Add Router Select Virtual Router as the route type provide a Name and Description for the Router and Click Finish Then Click the Route Names button to edit and import route points into the virtua
192. lved in the route O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 163 The View Hidden menu item is no longer actively used It displays routers that are hidden when they are involved in a gateway router Scenes Menu The scenes menu will list any scenes available to the selected router Clicking on one of the scenes in that menu will activate the scene See the section above on editing and creating scenes The Edit menu item will open a scene in the scene editor wizard The Capture Scene will capture the existing router routing configuration and present in the the scene editor for modification as a new scene The New Empty Scene menu item will open the scene editor with a new empty scnene User Panels Menu The User panel menu will only be present if user panels have been created using the Panel Designer application and saved in the PFSPanels folder of the server See the section in this document on Panel Designer for details Under this menu item you will find a list of the custom user panels available to be opened and used by the system Selecting any of the panels in this menu will open the panel in the PathfinderPC Client Meter Bridge Menu The meter bridge Add menu item will add meters for routes that are currently selected in an Axia Router to the meter bridge window If the meter bridge window is not open it will also open that window This is equivalent to right clicking on the route line in the router window Toolbars Men
193. ly get to either the list of available qualifiers or actions It will also allow you to open a separate side window with all of the qualifiers and actions Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 59 Stacking Event Editor Palette A Qualifiers Route Silence Audio Level Detect Clipping Present Qu Q GPI State GPO State User Panel Time Change Change Button Range 0 O 0 Protocol Event Memory Memory Translat Syste Slot List O Y y m Actions 7 Y 4 QO Route GPI State GPO State User Panel Change Change Button Activate Send Run Script Protocol Scene E Mail Translat OGG Memory Memory Run SA Axia Slot List Command Eleme Aim PEN Li A x This external list allows you to keep the list of usable qualifiers and actions the lists of assigned qualifierd and actions and the properties list all open at the same time for a quicker and easier workflow Right clicking anywhere is a list of qualifiers or actions will allow you to change the list from an icon view to a list details or tile view Example 1 GPI Triggered Route and Email Now that we understand how to use the editor let s create a stack event In this example stack event we are going to create an event that makes a route and sends an email when a particular GPI is closed To run this example you will need an Axia Audio Router and an Axia GPIO Router already configured in your system See the Add Routers section of
194. mand GetList ElementProfiles lt ElementIP gt Example GetList ElementProfiles 172 16 1 4 Return Columns Availability ID Name Example O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 224 BeginList ElementProfiles 172 16 1 4 2007 ID Name 1 DanShow 2 MarkShow 8 ProtocolTranslators Returns a list of Protocol Translators in the System Aliases pt Command GetList ProtocolTranslators Example GetList ProtocolTranslators Return Columns Availability ID Name Description Type ConnectionStyle Serial TCP UDP UDPSend ConnectionPort Example BeginList ProtocolTranslators 2007 07 14_ 13 15 22 001 ID Name Description Type 1 My Translator For Me SA Protocol Translator ProphetInterface For Prophet Probel General Router 9 UserPanels Returns a list of User Panels in the System Aliases up Command GetList UserPanels Example GetList UserPanels Return Columns Availability PanelName FileName Example BeginList UserPanels 172 16 1 4 2007 0 Avail PanelName FileName 0 DanPanel DanPanel xml 331 331 xml O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 225 10 PanelControls Returns a list of Panel Controls in a specific Panel by type Aliases pc Command GetList PanelControls lt PanelName gt lt ControlType gt If ControlType is blank returns all Controls on the Panel Available Control Types include Label Button Form Example GetList Pane
195. me will be communicating In this way we can make a single automation system cluster aware PathfinderPro Control SAPortRouter is an actual router Since this is true PathfinderPro Server can control it like any other router Within PathfinderPro Server add a new router of type SAPortRouter and configure with the IP address settings for the computer hosting the SAPortRouter application See the PathfinderPro Server documentation to set this up Once complete Pathfinder can dynamically schedule and activate serial routing changes just like any other router Third Party Remote Control SAPortRouter has a TCP port that is dedicated for remote control This can be used for third party applications which need to make routing changes to SAPortRouter This protocol can be seen in action by telnetting to the Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 199 computer hosting SAPortRouter on port 11045 You can then type a to get a list of commands Type the command name and a to get details on how to use the command For Example gt gt ActivateRoute RouteStat PortState PortName Type the name of a command plus a space and a question mark for detailed help on a command Example ActivateRoute gt gt Remote Control Command List RouteStat returns the routing status of the system gt gt RouteStat Display Current Route Statistics of a specific destination or all destinations If No Specific Destination Point
196. n 1 You will notice the outline style diagram This is often an advantageous way to design Stack Event logic on paper before you create your events especially if your event will be complex In the example above the action for StackEventA will trigger the qualifier for StackEventB which will in turn trigger the Action for StackEventB which triggers the qualifier for StackEventA You now have an endless loop causing the route to switch back and forth forever There is nothing to prevent you from creating such an event and it can bring the server application to its knees as it tries vainly to toggle the route back and forth as fast as it can The Loop inhibitor may disable this event automatically if the changes are executing fast enough If you think you have accidentally created an endless loop with a stack event it is easy to diagnose Simply move the stack event group file out of the PFSStackEvents folder and re launch the server application If the problem goes away the stack event needs to be redesigned Example 4 Latching Talkback Button A This example is actually deprecated and should no longer be used to create a latching button There is a much simpler method for creating a latching button which is outlined in Example 4 However we have left the method below in the manual as a teaching tool because it makes some very important points about stack events and how they work So read on In this example we will create a talkback button simi
197. n is released StackEventC clears the memory slot but StackEventB will not run because the button is now up The next time the button is pushed the memory slot is empty again and the button state is On and the button is down so StackEventB runs which again first sets the memory slot to a value so StackEventA will not run again until the button is released If the memory slot change does not precede the Button state change in the action list however the whole thing will fall apart So there are two important points that should be learned from this example First Actions are processed in the order in which they are listed in the event Second an action as soon as it is processed can cause another stack event to be processed even before all of the other actions in the first event are executed Example 5 Latching Talkback Button B So now that we have seen the difficult method for creating a latching button let s simplify it a bit This time add a UserButton qualifier and a route change in both the action if met and action if not met lists In the Userbutton qualifier enter the Button Name properties This time use the Button State On as the qualifying property instead of the Key state Leave the Key State as no change Then click on the latching checkbox at the buttom of the properties Now set the route you want to make when the state is on in the Actions if met and the one you wish to make when the button is off in the Actions if not me
198. n the PathfinderPC or PathfinderPC Mini applications This allows you to create your own custom interfaces for your users with only the items you want them to use displayed Using this tool you can create a user panel with background colors and pictures and drag and drop buttons labels meters clocks and web browsers onto the form These controls can then be stretched to different sizes and moved and placed precisely on the form Finally each control has a list of properties that can be set to define the control s behavior when the panel is used in the system Itis important to understand that the Panel will not actually perform any routing or control functions from within the Panel Designer The designer only allows you to design and define the panel When you are finished designing the panel it should be saved to the PFSPanels Folder within the PathfinderPC Server folder Then any panel in this folder will become available for use by PathfinderPC Client or PathfinderPC Mini Creating a Panel To begin creating a user panel switch to the tabs panel on PathfinderPC Server and click Add Panel Once the Panel Designer application launches from the File Menu select Create Panel Pathfinder Panel Designer Ver 4 54 RC10 File Edit Insert You can then resize the main panel form to be the correct size At this point in time there are several objects available in the Panel Designer tool bar on the left of the application depending on you
199. n the edit window as shown above Begin by clicking on and entering the server IP addresses for PathfinderPro If you are running a single server you can enter the same IP address in both Primary and Secondary If you have a PathfinderPro Cluster you can enter both server IP addresses UserName and Password The username and password fields are very important By default they are set to the default Pathfinder Administrator account The username and password you select needs to be a user in the PathfinderPC Server s user database If you select an Admin user the user will have the rights to change the Engine they are controlling and the VMIX faders that are visible using the Edit button If you select a General User clicking the edit button will ask for an Administrator username and password If one is not provided the O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 186 only thing the user will be able to change is which PathfinderPC Server the VMIX is connected to In this way an Administrator can configure VMIXControl on the workstation using a PathfinderPC Server Administrative account and then after clicking Apply the user will be locked into using the configured Engine and faders Therefore the username and password that is entered in this part of the configuration should be the one that the user will generally be running under After configuring these settings click Apply MEF Vix Control Version 1 04 E Engine 172 16 1 10 VMIX
200. name and password are correct for connecting to and logging into the router Click Next SA Port Router Wizard x Enter the Specific communication Settings IP Address 172 16 1 123 Winsock Port 111045 UserName Password ps Cancel lt lt Back Next gt gt Finish Verify that the number of sources and destinations is correct for the given router Click Next again A SA Port Router Wizard xi Enter the Specific Number of Points on the Router Source Coordinates hi 6 Destination Coordinates 16 Finish Finally click Finish to add the router into the system SA Port Router Wizard All Information has been collected for this Router l Click Finish to Complete the Changes x Next gt gt Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 35 NTI Veemux The NTI Veemux Router controls NTI Veemux VGA Routers Since TCP IP winsock is the only method used by this router this option cannot be changed Click Next 8 NTI Veemux VGA Router Wizard xj Please Select the format used to communicate with this Router TCPAP Winsock Einish Next verify that the TCP setting username and password are correct for connecting to and logging into the router Click Next 8 NTI Veemux VGA Router Wizard x Enter the Specific communication Settings IP Address 172 16 1 234 Winsock Port 2000 Password e
201. nel giving it a name and making sure it is being saved to the PFSPanels folder within the PathfinderPC Server folder Now launch the PathfinderPC Client application If it is already started you may have to restart it before the panel will be available You will notice that there should now be a menu in PathfinderPC Client called User Panels Under that menu item you will find your newly created user panel If you create additional panels and save them to the PFSPanels folder on the server they also will appear under this menu item Click on the name of the panel to open the panel If the MapRouter MapSource and MapDestination fields have valid entries clicking the buttons should now cause the routes to be made and the button colors to change accordingly To use this panel within PathfinderPC Mini edit the configuration file and be sure the server IP addresses are defined and enter the PanelName to open in the configuration file See the section on PathfinderPC Mini for details Then launching PathfinderPC Mini will run this panel as its own application Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 170 If you close and reopen the panel designer you can use the File menu to open and edit the Panel 1f you want to change it later Once you resave the changes you must close and open the panel again within PathfinderPC Client to get the changes to display In PathfinderPC Mini just close and re launch the application to view your changes
202. neously The designer can select multiple controls using the shift and or control keys and then use the Cut copy and paste functions from the menu or quick keys to duplicate controls The edit menu also provides automatic alignment tools By selecting multiple controls and then selecting the Align Left Right Top or Bottom all of the selected controls can be aligned The software will pick the farthest current edge to the selected direction out of the selected controls and align all of them to that edge So 1f the designer selects several controls and then selects align left the software will find the control which currently has the left most edge and it will align all of the selected controls to that edge The spread vertically and horizontally menu item will spread the selected controls out evenly over the space occupied by the selected controls Setting Control Properties Each object within a User Panel including the main form itself has a unique set of Properties that can be manipulated to define the look and behavior of the object when it gets used within the system These are shown in the bottom of the Right hand panel Whenever you click on an object in the User Panel the appropriate set of properties for that control will display It is these properties that must be set to make the control do anything in the PathfinderPC System when the panel is opened and run using either PathfinderPC Client or PathfinderPC Mini For example if you cl
203. ng this property will cause the save function to default to a filename matching the panel name The Panel Name and Filename should always match Caption The caption that will be displayed at the top of the panel Width and Height Displays the width and height of the form Change these parameters by resizing the form BackgroundPicture Select a background picture for the form This picture file must be available to all clients either in the network share folder defined in the Default Graphics Path property or it must exist on each client machine in the PanelGraphics folder in the PathfinderPC Client or Mini installation folder Backcolor The background color of the form Defining a picture in the BackgroundPicture property will override this setting ForeColor Not used at this point in time OnLoad Used to run customized scripts and scripting commands when the panel loads See the scripting documentation for details of commands that can be used in this field Default Graphics Path Defines a network share where client applications may search for the graphics files defined throughout the panel sets Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 174 Label Control Properties Type Defines the object type as label and cannot be changed by the designer Name Defines the name of the label control This name will be used to identify the control
204. nistrator wants an event to execute a bunch of times in a short prtiod of time and so might need to alter these settings However except in very rare cases these settings will not need to be changed Advanced Stack Event Settings x Loop inhibitor max iterations 10 Per ft 00 ms Inhibited False OK The Add Edit and Remove buttons allow you to add an event to the group You can also edit an event by double clicking on the event in the event list on the left This will open up a new view of the editor to edit the individual qualifiers and actions in the event as shown below la xi Name MyEvent Other Details x a Description o Qualifiers 0 Logic All Qualifier Details Open Palette v Name Type Description eee EA Description Actions If Met 0 Delayed Actions If Met 0 Delay ls seconds 2 Actions If Not Met 0 Delayed Actions If Not Met 0 Delay 5 seconds _ Move Up Move Down Cut Copy Paste mia gt Eat Remove The Name and Description of the event are also editable in the top section of this screen Stack events work by analyzing the list of qualifiers and then running the appropriate actions Therefore the left hand side of this screen contains a number of lists It contains the list of qualifiers involved in the event as well as 4 different Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 57 action lists The Actions If Met are actions which
205. nitor Section Talk to Control Room Detect if the talk to control room is on or off e Monitor Section Talk to Studio Detect if the talk to studio is on or off e Monitor Section Soft A B C D Fusion only Detect if the Fusion s monitor section soft buttons are up down on or off e IFB Livewire Channel Detect changes to the IFB Channel e IFB Livewire Engaged Detect if IFB is engaged Device Failure This qualifier allows you to monitor a device for failure If PathfinderPC Server is no longer able to communicate with the device it will be considered in a failed state and this qualifier will be true Select the device from the list of devices PathfinderPC Server knows about This qualifier will be analyzed any time Pathfinder senses the device to be available or not available Negate will cause the qualifier to be True the device is online rather than off line DeviceFailure D tion ss sSOSOSSSSSCS Negate E Device 172 16 1 254 satestserver gt Move Up Move Down Cut Copy Paste Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 88 AES Sync Loss This qualifier allows you to monitor AES Audio sources for a loss of AES sync signal Select the Axia Audio Router The only Sources that will be available are those that are AES sources on the network Select the source to finish configuring this qualifier This qualifier will evaluate True if the Axia device r
206. nly It displays unique identtifying keys for stack event items currently loaded in the server This command requires one of the following arguments Memory Profile User Audio AudioWatched GPIO GPIOWatched Routing Time UserPanel VMIX EventSysStart ConsoleLWCH ConsoleFACH DeviceFail AESSyncLoss LWMuteOnAES LWStreamFail Example gt gt ShowStackKeys UserPanel StackKeys UserPanel TestLockllLockllLock LockButtonll TestWernerllTimeTestllPanel1 Button2Il gt ShowSubscriptions lt RouterNumber gt Shows the Silence Detection subscriptions for a given router This is only valid for Axia Audio Routers at this point in time This command is primarily used for debugging The return value will have a source column a destination column a type column and the name of the object that asked for the subscription The type column is for future use and will always be 2 for now The return will list all the subscriptions the server has and then relist them by device Example gt gt ShowSubscriptions 1 showsubscriptions 1 1 9 2 StackEvent_Test_Junk_10 23 1 2 ProtTrans_1_ACU1_Prophet O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 211 50 1 2 ProtTrans_1_ACU1_Prophet 51 1 2 ProtTrans_1_ACU1_Prophet 52 Il 2 ProtTrans_1_ACU1_Prophet 53 1 2 ProtTrans_1_ACU1_Prophet 54 1 2 ProtTrans_1_ACU1_Prophet 55 1 2 ProtTrans_1_ACU1_Prophet 56 1 2 ProtTrans_1_ACU1_Prophet 1 3 2 Events_1_EASTest 62 l 2 Events_1_EASTest 63 l
207. nly one server is processing the commands at any point in time You should also see data counters changing on the main screen showing successful data flow If you do not you may need to use the File Menu and select Settings to rework the configuration until you get it to work correctly Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 243 Software Authority ACU 1 Prophet Version Bridge Application Ed Software Authority ACU Bridge File Ports Status Bytes In Bytes Out Serial Port Open M cosa NES NP Server ATCP closed o0 o Server BTCP Closed o0 oo Version 1 01 The ACU 1 Bridge application works and is set up in exactly the same fashion as the generic bridge application The only exception is that the configuration screen for this bridge does not include the message packaging settings The protocol is known and defined and the bridge automatically takes care of this for you Ed Settings Jeg Serial Port TCP Client Server A Port 0 Port fo v Server A IP 127 0 0 1 Server A IP 57600 E 8 1 000 0 Server B IP 127 0 0 1 Save Cancel In order to use the ACU 1 Bridge application it is important to set the Protocol Translator properly in PathfinderPC Server Be sure to select the Sine ACU 1 Prophet Version translator and set it up on a TCP port Also be sure to turn on the checkbox to Use Software Authority Bridge If this is not turned on the proper status information will not get
208. ns to the original state enter the pulse length in milliseconds in the Pulse field In addition it is possible to enter a Channel Number which will effectively change the Livewire Channel number associated with the GPO If this field is blank no change will be made to this assignment GPOStateChange f1 ouT 1 y r Output Cosure Be Gee State O No Change Low High a Pulse Length iC Move Up Move Down Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 94 User Button Property This action allows the user to change the state of software buttons defined in a Panel using Panel Designer It will also change the state of any hardware buttons mapped to these software user panel buttons See the Panel Designer section of this document for details on software panels and hardware mapping Enter the User Panel and button name in the Button Name field in the format PanelName ButtonName The HostIP ButtonModule and ButtonNumber fields may be used instead of a Panel Designer button name to make this Action change an Axia hardware User Panel or Accessory Panel button Enter the Host IP of the Console CPU or rack mount button panel hosting the button and select the module number and button number to use You can use the fields to select colors for the buttons The primary colors can be entered by name for example Red Green Blue You can create subtler color shades by using RGB
209. nt included in the router Optionally you can select a minimum pulse length which will lengthen any short pulses to the length requested This value is in milliseconds This behaves similar to a debounce circuit Finally click Finish to add the router into the system PFS Remote Setup Wizard loj x de EM 172 16 1 254 EllV DanGPIO Destinations GPO Sources GPI EM 172 16 16 1 El DanGPIO EC Destinations GPO Y Sources GPI OM 1 v 2 v 3 Minimum Pulse Length o Cancel lt lt Back Next gt gt OUT 1 ON Element 001 05 OUT 2 ON Element 001 05 OUT 3 ON Element 001 05 OUT 4 ON Element 001 05 Finish The Pathfinder remote by port and by pin routers use the Software Authority protocol on port 9500 in order to monitor and make changes Therefore those ports must be available in the communications between cities This may require modifying firewall rules between the cities to allow this to work properly O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 33 XI Audio UDP Router The XI Audio UDP Router is a centralized router of IPort Mpeg UDP streams Please email udp info xiaudio com for information about this router Since TCP IP winsock is the only method used by this router this option cannot be changed Click Next E XI Audio UDP Router Wizard xi Please Select the format used to communicate with this Router TCP IP Winso
210. ntered for this to work properly HwMapType If the control is to be mapped to a hardware control this selects the type of hardware control to which to map The options are Button Label and GPIO GPIO will map to a GPIO circuit Button will map to an Axia User Panel Button and label will map to the LCD label strip on an Element User button panel HWMapHostIP The IP address of the Element CPU or GPIO device that hosts the control for the hardware map device HWMapHostPort This is the TCP port to which to connect to control the Hardware device This should not generally be changed by the designer It is automatically selected when the HWMapType is selected HWMapInternalName This is the name of the software object that is being mapped to the hardware Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 178 object Again this field is automatically set according to the name of the Panel and the name of the control It should generally not be changed by the designer HWMapAxiaSysName This is the name of the hardware object being mapped to the software object This cannot be directly changed by the designer but is created based on the remaining two drop down properties For GPIO Port Number and Circuit Number For Button and Label UserPanel Module and UserPanel Button GPIO Port When the HWMapType is GPIO this selects the GPIO port on a GPIO device that will be used in the software to
211. number of the source that is routed to a destination funct SourceNameRoutedTo lt RouterNum gt lt DestNumber gt Returns the name of the source that is routed to a destination funct SourceDescriptRoutedTo lt RouterNum gt lt DestNumber gt Returns the description of the source that is routed to a destination funct CurrentElementProfileID lt IPAddress gt Returns the ID Number of the currently loaded Element Profile funct CurrentElementProfileName lt IPAddress gt Returns the currently loaded Element Profile Name funct CurrentElementProfileState lt IPAddress gt Returns the state of the currently loaded Element Profile funct S tarts With lt DataString gt lt StartsWithString gt Returns a String True or False as to whether the DataString starts with the StartsWithS tring Case Insensitive funct MemorySlotValue lt SlotNameOrNumber gt Returns the value in a specific memory slot funct Add lt NumberA gt lt NumberB gt Adds two numbers and returns the result funct ProfileNameLoadedToFader lt ElementIP gt lt FaderNum gt Returns the name of the source profile loaded to a physical fader requires element version 2 2 0 9 or later or PowerStation version 1 0 2g or later funct Profile DLoadedToFader lt ElementIP gt lt FaderNum gt Returns the ID Number of the Profile loaded to a physical fader requires element version 2 2 0 9 or later or PowerStation
212. o TLS Corp Page 86 Axia Console Change Name Console LWChannel This qualifier allows you to monitor changes y on an Axia console Select the Axia Console Description at to monitor You can select a livewire channel Negate a number which means the qualifier will respond to changes made on whichever fader on the sop He ese Cowen 08k B console has that Livewire Channel number loaded to it Fader Number ole Alternatively you can select the physical fader empi number on the console which means it will 7 Source Profile Y No Change i gt respond to whatever happens on that fader no maher what livewire channel number is loaded aia E E No Change On to it Off f On Or you can select the Monitor Section Program 2 Y No Change on Depending on the selection different options will be available Program 3 No Change Ee i Generally you will use the On Off state as the On primary qualifier property If the Fader is Program 4 4 No Change on J turned on then the qualifier will be evaluated as True If it is turned Off then it will be On M No Change Se f Off evaluated as false On Button A No Ch 2g Any properties that are not set to No Change a ahr Down will be used as part of the analysis and must U match for the qualifier to evaluate as True Off Button Y No Change ca aa o This qualiner will be analyzed any time one of Mite Z No Change n 1 the properties for the selected chan
213. o version of this software 1s functional with the following limitations The server software shuts down after 120 minutes It may then be restarted but 1t will only run for 120 minutes at a time In the demo version only three routers may be created on the server They can be any combination of real or virtual routers The only thing that is necessary to upgrade the demo version to a fully functional version of the software is a license key for the server application Simply contact Axia or Software Authority at the number or email listed below to obtain a valid license key You can either purchase a PathfinderPC or a PathfinderPro license The differences in these licenses are outlined in a chart at the beginning of this document A valid license key must be purchased for each instance of the server application The client applications may be placed on as many machines as desired eS Contact Information Any additional questions may be directed to Axia Audio 2101 Superior Avenue Software Authority Inc Cleveland OH 44114 6001 West Creek Rd USA Independence OH 44118 USA Telephone 1 216 241 7225 E mail inquiry AxiaAudio com Telephone 1 216 654 0194 E mail techsupport softwareauthority com 6001 West Creek Road Independence Ohio 44131 Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 204 Appendix A Software Authority Control Protocol Overview The Software Authority control protocol
214. ociating GPIO closures with the VMIX sub mixers and Channels Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 114 Protocol Translator Setup Pomerst001 053 PowerSt 001 053 EN VSubMix 1 ACU 1 o GPO ACU_Relay_1 to 5 OUT 1 GPI2 Opto 6 to 10 i GPI3 Opto 11 to 15 E Channel2 Click in the GPIO column for each VMIX sub mixer GPO ACU Relay to assign the GPO port 5 closures to be fired as relays by the ACU relay translation Then select up to three GPI ports 15 closures on the Axia network for each VMIX Channel These GPIs will be passed though as Optos to the controlling device Prophet if the VMIX Channel is on and the closure occurs The GPI Hold time will cause the translator to hold a GPI for a period of time when reporting to the automation system even if the Axia GPI returns high before that period of time is up Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 115 io xi Select the Element This Translator will Control Control PowerSt 001 053 y Engine PowerSt 001 053 y Default Silence Time 30 7 Seconds J Use Software Authority Bridge GPI Hold Time ms 0 El VSubMix 1 ACU 1 GPO ACU_Relay_1 to 5 OUT 1 1 OUT1 OUT 1 ON Element E Channel 1 GPI1 Opto 1 to 5 OUT OUT 1 GPI2 Opto 6 to 10 E GPI3 Opto 11 to 15 E Channel 2 OM o o m 1 OUT 1 ON Element OUT 1 ON Element 001 05
215. oftware Authority command as defined in the Software Authority Protocol Translator Protocol document installed in the PathfinderPC Server folder Enter the command to run in the defined field Name RunSACommand x y A Description st st i s s i S Command ActivateRoute 1 56 78 a Move Up Move Down Axia Console Profile Change This action will change an Axia Console User Profile Select the Console and Profile from the drop down lists to load when the Action is run Name ProfileChange Console 172 16 1 53 PowerSt 001 053 y gt Profile 1 Testing 01 with ICom y ee Move Up Move Down Cut Copy Paste Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 100 VMIX Change This action will make a change to an VMIX Channel Select the Mix Engine and Channel from the drop down lists You can then turn the Channel On or Off by modifying the state field In addition you can deselect the No Change checkbox for the Gain TimeUP and or TimeDown fields and enter new values for those fields When the action is run any of these fields that is not set to No Change will be updated to the assigned value on the selected Vmix channel In this way the action can turn VMIX channels on and off change their gain and or adjust their fade times This feature is only enabled with a PRO license Name VMIXChange z ka oa MxEngne 17216153 P
216. oftware Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 176 Button Control Properties Type This defines the object type as button and cannot be changed by the designer Name Defines the name of the button control This name will be used to identify the control in stack events in the form PanelName ControlName Caption Sets the textual information to be displayed in the button Height The height of the control Change this parameter by right clicking on the control and resizing it or manually editing this property value Width Displays the width of the control Change this parameter by right clicking on the control and resizing it or manually editing this property value Top Displays the position of the top edge of the control on the panel Change this parameter by right clicking on the control dragging it to a new location or manually editing this property value Left Displays the position of the left edge of the control on the panel Change this parameter by right clicking on the control dragging it to a new location or manually editing this property value BackcolorOff Defines the background color of the button when it is in the off state This color will be overridden if a picture is assigned to the button BackcolorOn Defines the background color of the button when it is in the on state This color will be overridden if a picture is assigned to the button ForeColor Defines the color of the
217. ommand out a protocol Translator port SentVmixStateRequest ID 4016 Group Type Router Device Description PathfinderPC Server is sending a request for the current state of a VMIX resource Sent VmixChange ID 4017 Group Type Router Device Description PathfinderPC Server is sending a request to change a VMIX channel parameter SentProbelNak ID 4018 Group Type Protocol Translator Description PathfinderPC Server has received a bad or incorrectly formatted Probel Router message and is returning a NAK to the sender SentProbelTimeoutResend ID 4019 Group Type Protocol Translator Description PathfinderPC Server has not received an Ack from a device to which it sent a message for more than the timeout period of time and is therefore resending the message ServerEvents This section of log messages pertains to events that occur on the PathfinderPC Server LogEngineStarted ID 5001 Group Type None Description The Logging engine has started O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 127 EventEngineStarted ID 5002 Group Type None Description The Event Engine has started In a cluster only one server in the cluster will have the Event Engine started at any point in time See the clustering section of this document for details EventEngineStopped ID 5003 Group Type None Description The Event Engine has stopped In a cluster only one server in the clust
218. onicion trataran denia Ansa taba 60 MORE EXAMPLES i iaa 68 Example 2 Time Dat sd A a aiid ae tees 68 Example 3 Talkb ck Buttons iii A id A Lai Dd AA dd ieee 69 Endless LOODS 2 oia cas 72 Example 4 Latching Talkback Button A scccccccssssessceeesecesncecnsecesnceessecseneecssecseneecsaecseneeesaecseneecsaeceeeeeeaaeceeneeesaeceeneeenaeees 73 Example 5 Latching Talkback Button Buin ie EE od ire 75 FUNCTION Still E otesasesueutusteus teas aaa apiatia 76 STACKE VENT QUALIFIERS une rl BER ean E AR he ee ee al 78 ROUCO AS A Nici 30h cua iS io Sa On Cg oases PEE Wee CL Nita scab A eats 78 Silence Clipping Level Presentador nitrilo Se id nie E E E ii 78 GPI State Che A A A ae Bonds A A AO ad ESEE 79 GPO State ANA O NOS 79 UseriButlon POSS o da 80 Time Date Rango e oe eee ig td Ueda oe ais dc ew baba ends ie dra iia lb 8l Protocol Translator Command ReCeived u cc sscccsccccssecessceesseceeneecssecsencecsaeceeceecssecsencecsaecseneecsaecseneecsaeceeaeeesaeceeeeecsaeceeeeeenaeens 82 Memory MEA cdtaatien ing dasha adnshles a A a vases nenaubice avec Aeon eto ode EE 83 Memory Mati E ec TINS Oi SG AA AS ve eee aera asd 84 Event Engine Start nonren annn Aisi e A a ed a dies 85 Axia Console Profle Change siii A E a dea 85 VMIX CHANGE cai aii reirse iia 86 Axa Console CHANGE 0s siii dia 87 D vice Ediles 88 AES SYNC LOSS naa top ip act pia 89 Mite On IN AAA E A E EE ES Saint 89 EW Ea o a e te A LU 90 KDA LOE PEE A e A Glee sd 91 L
219. only understand GPIO triggers could use these to make Element console functions take place ZSystems Videoquip The ZSystems detanglers are 64x64 or 128x128 AES switchers The VideoQuip DS1224 is a 12x24 switcher of 9 pin machine control connections Both are controlled with a serial interface and have the same setup steps in PathfinderPCServer Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 27 First select the connection type In almost all cases for these routers the connection type will be Serial The only time TCP IP would be used for Sigma Videoquip or Z Systems routers would be if you are using an Ethernet IP to Serial converter Click Next Videoquip Router Setup x Please Select the format used to communicate with this Router E lt lt Back Next gt gt Finish Cancel Next verify that the serial settings are correct for the given router and select the serial port on the computer that is connected to the router Click Next xi Enter the Specific communication Settings Serial Port 1 SerialSpecs 9600 E 8 1 Set Serial greerereeeeeesensereseeseseneesereeg Einish ueesesesessesossssesoesssesosesseed Verify that the number of sources and destinations is correct for the given router Click Next again 35 Videoquip Router Setup E xj Enter the Specific Number of Points on the Router Source Coordinates 12 Destination Coordinates 24 Einish
220. onona 205 SERVER TO CLIENT COMMANDS ONLY cccccccccccccccscccscccscccscecseeeseeeseseseseseseseseseseseeesesesesesesesesesesesesesesescscsssescecsseceseceseseseveecs 218 APPENDIX B GETLIST FUNCTION FOR PROTOCOL TRANSLATOR ccsscscsessesesesecssseeeseees 219 COVER VIEW ai A A ti ced E E E E OOS bS 219 L INYA d O SAE EEE E e e ie 219 NONBOd Sne ia ia ji 219 INTL AAA NN 219 Ka a A a 220 INTA A Add 220 O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 7 Required LASS ia A A 221 EIAI ERIALA ENII EEEE E E AE ad a de aaah ee o el Ed o do da ao a de dl e do 236 APPENDIX C IP ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT TOOL ooncccocccooccccoocccnonnccnnoncnanaconnnnrnanaronnnnnnannrnonarananaras 237 APPENDIX D LEGACY SOFTWARE AUTHORITY BRIDGE APPLICATIONS cs00ssssssseees 240 SOFTWARE AUTHORITY GENERIC BRIDGE APPLICATION ccccccccccccccccccccccscccscscscscsescscsesescscsescscseseseseseessesescesecscecsceseceeecenscs 241 SOFTWARE AUTHORITY ACU 1 PROPHET VERSION BRIDGE APPLICATION Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 8 A Note From The Vice President of Axia 2013 marks a banner year for Axia this year marks the first decade of the Connected Studio In retrospect it s hard to believe it s been 10 years since a start up division of Telos grabbed everyone s attention with a radical idea about building radio studios using Ethernet At a time when state of the art meant discrete digital audio
221. ons this screen allows the end user to manually add route points and terminals into the system which were not Only use these manual add and edit buttons if you are automatically detected knowledgeable about the inner workings of your Axia Livewire system Add Edit Livewire Source Index Name HOBOX 02 09 Description SHOBOX 02 09 ON sa showbox 02 Total Destinations on Terminal 24 Livewire Stream Address ome cae sa showbox 02 Standard Stream Address 239 192 97 77 Livewire Terminals Only Leave Blank for Non Livewire PC Streams Terminal Control IP 172 16 9 13 Terminal Name Terminal Password FO 10 Number on Terminal je Total Sources on Terminal 24 Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 38 PathfinderPC PRO Server Menu Items File Menu Master TCP IP Socket This menu item allows an Administrator to change the TCP socket number on which PathfinderPC listens for client connections This should only be changed by an Administrator knowledgeable in TCP IP when the computer is already using the default 5200 port for another application If this port number is changed it must also be changed in all client applications which attempt to connect to PathfinderPC Server In addition there is a master control port default 9500 which third party applications can use to control Pathfinder using the Software Authority Protocol Define whether t
222. ons If Met 0 5 A Triggers from or makes a change to a GPI GPO State Change Delayed Actions If Met 0 Delay ls seconds gt 7 Triggers from or makes a change to a GPO User Panel Button Triggers from or makes a change to a user panel button 1439 Activate Scene Triggers from or makes a change to a scene Type cpistateChange GPIStateChange Actions If Not Met 0 gt Send E Mail Sends an e mail or SMS message A Run Script Mi Runs a PFS Script Delayed Actions If Not Met 0 Delay 5 seconds gt us Protocol Translator Command me Triggers from the receiving of or sends a specified command gt ae E Move Up Move Down Cut Copy Paste Add Edt Remove EE DemoEventGroup StackingEventEditor Name ert DemoEvent Other Details x a Description Qualifiers 1 Logic All x Actions If Met Details Open Palette v Type cpistateChange GPIStateChange Name SendEmail Q Description Z double click to add an item and close the palette Route Triggers from or makes a route GPI State Change A Triggers from or makes a change to a GPI GPO State Change Delayed Actions If Met 0 Delay ls seconds gt S Triggers from or makes a change to a GPO User Panel Button Triggers from or makes a change to a user panel button 149 Activate Scene Triggers from or makes a change to a scene Actions If Met 2
223. ons if not met are run If the logic drop down is set to Any then if any of the qualifiers evaluates to True then the Actions if met are run Otherwise the Actions if not met are run Some people may know this to be an If Then Else logic paradigm In reality under the hood the logic is slightly more nuanced than this The list of qualifiers is analyzed and the result of all of the qualifiers as a combination is given a True or False value depending on whether the logic is set to All or Any The system is event driven Therefore any time any item in the qualifier list changes it trips an analysis of the stack event If the resulting analysis proves to be different than the last time the analysis was made then the correct actions if met or not met are executed If the result of the qualifier set analysis is the same as the last time it was analyzed then it realizes the actions were already executed and do not need to be executed again In the case of a new event or events upon startup of the system they do not have a previous analysis to rely on Therefore the actions if met or not met are either executed or not executed depending on the run on startup option for the event The Run On Startup option is important to understand If the Run On Startup option is not selected the event will get analyzed for its initial state but no actions will be executed until that state changes again If you have a closure which starts an audio CD you may not want it to
224. ons in both the client and server wherever a drop down list is presented Standard Event System Standard Events may be Nk PathFinderServer WIN E7B258SRVO8 created by clicking on the Time Events Tab in the Main 12 18 2010 10 00 00 PM Server Page and then clicking Add Event There are three categories of events Time Based Events Audio Events and GPIO events Time based events are events which occur at a certain time either on a regular schedule or occur one time only Audio events allow you to program a silence detection point If the audio content on a particular point disappears for more than a certain amount of time a backup route may be engaged GPIO Events are events that are triggered by a GPI or GPO contact closure Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 47 Time Based Events There are two types of time based events Activate Route and Activate Scene Activate Route switches a route at a particular date and time or on some daily schedule and Activate Scene does the same for a scene To select a Time Based event add a new event and select either Activate Route or Activate Scene Click Next AM Event Wizard Select the Type of Event Activate Route Activate Scene Silence Detect Backup Route GPIO Triggered Route GPIO Triggered Snapshot Cancel Finish Select the routing system on which the event is to take place and the ro
225. onsider the delay to be a problem The last setting Use End Of Message allows you to define a text message which represents the end of a complete message Many communications protocols have a certain set of bytes that are used to indicate the end of a message This can be entered in the text box for this option and the software will then wait until it sees the end of message characters before packaging the complete message and sending it on To indicate non printable characters use the percent sign with a 2 digit hexadecimal number to represent the Ascii characters For example OD OA equates to a carriage return followed by a line feed Since the percent sign is used as an escape character if it is used in the end of message it also must be escaped 25 This last option is the most efficient if an end of message string exists in the protocol to be used You may need to try a number of these settings before finding the correct one for a given bridge configuration Select Save and the translator will start with the new settings You should see the serial port open and attempts to connect to the servers When successful connections are made the indicator dot will turn green It is normal and desirable that only 1 of the two TCP connections will be connected at any point in time As stated earlier the protocol translators on the PathfinderPC Server should be set up to only listen on the Server that currently owns the event system This guarantees that o
226. or deny or allow SceneChangeEdit 0 or 1 for deny or allow LevelControlChange 0 or 1 for deny or allow EventEdit 0 or 1 for deny or allow Settings the FullAccess Key to 0 will then allow granular control over client access restrictions to the system via the registry entries If the Full Access key is set to 0 the other registry keys must be used to specifically deny or allow access to aspects of the system O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Y Registry Editor Joa File Edit View Favorites Help C Realtek Name Type Data t a Schlumberger lab Default REG_5Z value not set C Seagate Software Re EventEdit REG_DWORD 0x00000000 0 Secure 82 FullAccess REG_DWORD ox00000001 1 Software Authority oI 2 PathFind Rg LevelControlChange REG_DWORD Ox00000000 0 gy he Panel_Junk REG_DWORD O0x00000001 1 a os 5 PathFinderPCServer i Router_Dandudio REG_DWORD ox00000001 1 Sa ZephyrRemote ig Router_DanGPIO REG_DWORD Ox00000001 1 E G ZephyrServer Re Router_VirtualRouterTest REG_DWORD Ox00000001 1 SolarWinds Net 22 virtualRouterEdit REG_DWORD oxo0000000 0 13 Sonic Sd Sony NS 7 My Computer HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Software AuthoritylPathFinderPC ACL Page 166 O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 167 Panel Designer The PathfinderPC Panel Designer application is a tool for creating custom user panels to be used either i
227. outerType gt If RouterType is absent a list of all routers will be returned Available Device Types include Example ZSystems Sigma Videoquip NTIVeemux SAPort AxiaAudio AxiaGPIO Metered Only returns routers that support metering and therefore silence detection clipping audio present GPIO Only returns GPIO style routers Virtual Gateway Generic Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 221 GetList Routers AxiaAudio Return Columns Availability ID Name Description Type SourceCount DestinationCount Example BeginList Routers 2007 07 14_13 15 22 001 Avail ID Name Description SourceCount 1 WZZZ Audio Main Audio Router AxiaAudio 758 WZZZ GPIO Main GPIO Router AxiaGPIO 253 2 SourceNames Returns the list of source names in a router in the system Aliases source src sn Command GetList SourceNames lt RouterNumber gt Example GetList SourceNames 1 Return Columns Availability ID Name Description Example BeginList SourceNames 1 2007 07 14_1 3 15 0 Avail ID Name Description 0 1 MySource This is my Source 2 YourSource This is your Source 3 DestinationNames Returns the list of destination names in a router in the system Aliases dest dst dn Command GetList DestinationNames lt RouterNumber gt Example Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 222 Return Columns Availability ID Name Description Example BeginList DestinationNames 1 2007 07 14 2
228. over the system Routes may be made by selecting router and the destination and then selecting the source you wish to be assigned to the destination Finally click Take or clear to establish the route or clear the destination All source and destination drop down lists in the software can also display the description column by clicking on the header row top fixed row of the drop down list You can also click on the schedule button to enter the scheduling menus for scheduling a route to happen at a particular time Route points may also be locked or unlocked using this panel Locked route points may not be taken by another user without specific confirmation Clicking on the padlock next to the line in the routing grid will also lock and unlock the point When the padlock is closed the point may not be changed unless it is unlocked first Clicking on a locked padlock to unlock the point will produce a warning asking if you really wish to unlock the route point There are some destinations that are locked at the system level of the device and therefore cannot be unlocked or changed by Pathfinder These include some Engine destinations that are involved in console operations While PathfinderPC will display the route status of these Engine Destinations it is not allowed to make changes to their routing at this point in time O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 147 That must be accomplished through the standard Console and Engine interfac
229. owersto001053 S gt l VMX Channel 5 VMIxsuBaINET a gt Gain O No Change 40 r State O No Change On Cor Time Down Z No Change y 1 Time Up Y No Change a 1 Move Up Move Down Execute Shell Command This action will make will execute a call as if it was from the windows command line It can be used to launch other applications batch files or windows scripts Move Up Move Down Cut Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Axia Console Change ace ConsoleLWChannel This action will make a change to an Axia Description mixing console Select the Axia console to AR 172 16 1 53 PowerSt 001 053 ok control Then either enter a Livewire Channel Number a fader number or the monitor section for the console If you select a Livewire Ses A y Channel number then the changes will be directed at whichever fader has that Livewire Monitor Section empty y D Channel number loaded to it If you select a Source Profile Y No Change empty flivli fader number from the fader number list then 0 the changes will be directed at the physical Program 1 lv No Change On Og U fader on the console no matter what livewire 2 El No Ch on O F channel is loaded to it And if you select the i ff Monitor section the changes will be directed at Program 3 Z No Change On 0 the monitor section Program 4 Y No Change On E Different fields will be enabled or di
230. ows Driver This will not work with node or Element GPIO ports And the computer running the driver must have an application that is aware of these messages The End Of Message field allows you to enter a command which is expected at the end of each message for the protocol that the port will be using This allows the application to wait until it has a complete message before sending it on to other ports to which this port is routed You can enter non typable characters by using plus a 2 digit ascii hex code So 0D 0A is equivalent to a carriage return and line feed If you leave this blank data will be sent as soon as it is received which will often be on a character by character basis The initialization command if present will be sent each time the port connects or opens Completing the Configuration Once your configuration is complete click the CommitChanges button to write the changes to the configuration file and then Stop and Start the Service The Automatically create reverse route checkbox means that if you route one port to another it will automatically also complete the opposite route This may or may not be desired depending on the application Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 196 Service State EJ SAPortRouter Configuration E XK 7000 9002 172 16 1 242 8000 Com4 9600 N 8 1 Serial PTCP SERVER PTCP CLIENT PGPIO PORT Fi TRASH Automatically Create Reverse Route
231. oxes in the system e LogSettings xml This file holds information about which logging options have been enabled for the system e PFSPanels Folder This folder contains xml files There is one xml file for each Panel that has been created by Panel Designer on the server e PFSScripts Folder This folder will usually be empty PathfinderPC Server has its own scripting engine that can be used by our developers for the rare situations where customization beyond the normal event systems is necessary e PFSStackEvents Folder This folder contains xml files There is one xml file for each Stack Event Group in the system e PFSTranslatorData Folder This folder contains xml files for certain protocol translator types that require more configuration data than is common to the ProtocolTrans database O O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 17 e Backup Folder This folder contains dated backups of the data files above as they go through critical changes and can be used to restore certain files to a previous state It can be cleaned up for space when needed by deleting older versions of the files e Syslogs Folder This folder contains log files It can be cleaned up as necessary and does not need to be backed up to restore a system on another machine if you wish to reduce the size of your backups If you need to restore Pathfinder to another system after a catastrophic failure simply install PathfinderServer and then copy the fold
232. pType If the control is to be mapped to a hardware control this selects the type of hardware control to which to map The options are Button Label and GPIO GPIO will map to a GPIO circuit Button will map to an Axia User Panel Button and label will map to the LCD label strip on an Element User button panel HWMapHostIP The IP address of the Element CPU or GPIO device that hosts the control for the hardware map device HWMapHostPort This is the TCP port to which to connect to control the Hardware device This should not generally be changed by the designer It is automatically selected when the HWMapType is selected HW MapInternalName This is the name of the software object that is being mapped to the hardware object Again this field is automatically set according to the name of the Panel and the name of the control It should generally not be changed by the designer HWMapAxiaSysName This is the name of the hardware object being mapped to the software object This cannot be directly changed by the designer but is created based on the remaining two drop down properties For GPIO Port Number and Circuit Number For Button and Label UserPanel Module and UserPanel Button Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 175 GPIO Port When the HWMapType is GPIO this selects the GPIO port on a GPIO device that will be used in the software to hardware map GPIO Circuit When the HWMapType is GPIO this select
233. pment should be master If this is an additional router level select slave and then select the router from the drop down list which is the master The connection details will disappear for a slave router because they are entered in the master Also select the number of the level you will be controlling If the router is master select the connection type The connection type might be serial or TCP and the correct fields will be displayed depending on the connection type being chosen The database File field will automatically be filled by the software upon router creation and is not available for manual editing Select the number of sources X Coordinates and Destinations Y Coordinates The Other field may be left blank This may contain login information for some routers Finally click Finish to add the router into the system Sigma Router Wizard 4 Router Name MySigma Connection Type Serial 8 y senatPort 7 SerialSpecs 19200 N 8 1 Set Serial x Database File X Coordinates 15 Y Coordinates 16 Other Master Bay Level Master 4 idfjh y Level Slave Level 1 y Cancel lt lt Back Next gt gt Finish Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 29 Pathfinder Remote GPIO ByPort By Pin There are three routers in this category The Pathfinder Remote router is for future development and is not available at this point in time T
234. r For an Axia Router this will display all of the Axia devices along with their IP address and device type that are incorporated in the particular PathfinderPC Real Router It also displays the current Connection State Clicking on the blue IP address link for any of these devices will open the device s web configuration page The Resend Init button allows an Administrator to select a device and resend initialization data to it and the Reconnect button forces a drop and reconnection to the selected device 2101 x Router Name Device IP Device Type ET State al DanAudio 1 O PSIO 001 055 172 16 1 55 iceio Connected O Omnia ONE 172 16 1 57 Connecting Romulus 172 16 1 60 Engine Connected Engine 001 063 172 16 1 63 Engine Connected Omnia8x 001 069 172 16 1 69 OmniaSx Connected oO 44ND 001 081 172 16 1 81 LivelO Connected AMND 001 083 172 16 1 83 LiveMic Connected O SADanvvin 172 16 1 241 Socket Closed gt Resend Init Reconnect Done Please note that any device that does not have the device type listed within the first 60 seconds after the server launches should be tested for proper operation as this is usually a signal that PathfinderPC Server cannot contact it properly The logging and log files if configured can also supply more information Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 44 Prefe
235. r than the finger s button release therefore the qualifiers for StackEventB are true and its actions are executed triggering the qualifiers of Action A Therefore we must find a way to only allow one event to run each time the button is pushed The solution is to use a memory slot Memory slots can be defined in an action by using a name and a value for the slot Then they can also be qualifiers O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 74 StackEventB Qualifier User Panel DemoPanel DemoButton ButtonDown State On MemorySlot MyButtonMem Value field blank Action Memory Slot MyButtonMem ENGAGED Route Change Route Source 1 to Destination 1 User Panel Set DemoPanel DemoButton State to Off StackEventC Qualifier User Panel DemoPanel DemoButton ButtonUp Action Memory Slot MyButtonMem Value field blank It is very important to understand that the actions in a stack event are processed in the order in which they appear in the list Thus when the button is pressed for the first time in StackEventA the memory slot MyButtonMem has not been defined and so it is empty Therefore since it is empty and the current state of the button is off and it is down the qualifiers are true The first action that the StackEventA runs is to define a value for MyButtonMem Now that memory slot is no longer blank so StackEventB will not run when Stack Event A makes the Route Change and button state change Then when the butto
236. r Hosts E A SAVISO Local Listening DPF Clients Connected E Ba Clustering Addresses oE 192168 1 101 172 1613 O Event System Running Eh SASERVERA Connected 0 PF Clients Connected Ba Clustering Addresses oE 172161 32 O E Event System Now if we shut down the PathfinderPC Server application on the ServerA Server B will show the loss of connection and will try to re establish the connection If it can t it it will start up its own event system Then when the ServerA is restored the event system will go back into pending on ServerB and ServerA will take over again once the converging and synchronization of data has taken place Furthermore PathfinderPC clients automatically get the list of servers in the cluster when they connect Thus if the server that the client is connected to fails the client will automatically roll to the other server The current server a client is using is shown in the bottom left corner of the PathfinderPC screen and will flash yellow when it is attempting to reconnect or connect to a different server Here is a review if the basic steps for creating a PathfinderPC Server cluster 1 Obtain 2 PCs preferably running Microsoft Standard Server 2 Install 4 NIC cards in each server a Assign 1 NIC card in each server an IP address on the Axia Network b Assign 1 NIC card in each server an IP address on the business Network if desired c Assign 1 NIC card in each server a private IP address for crossover
237. r for the User database to be used the menu item Password Mode Manual Login Required under the File menu must be selected EA Note Using the user database is a powerful tool for limiting a user s rights on the system However some Administrator s would prefer that their users not have to use a login user name and password each time they open up a PathfinderPC Client In that situation select the Password Mode No Password required menu item in the File menu Then there are several registry entries that may be used on the PathfinderPC client workstation to limit the client application s access to the system instead See the registry settings section in the PathfinderPC section of this document for details O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 41 Email Alert Settings This menu item opens a screen where the Administrator can define the email server settings required for the PathfinderPC system to send email alerts These settings are similar to the ones required by most email client applications to send mail through your corporate email server Contact your email server administrator for the correct settings for this window Email Master Settings Enter the Email Server Settings to send Alert Emails These settings are the same you as you would use in your mail client application such as Outlook Express to send email Email Server mail mydomain com Example mail yourdomain com
238. r gain If it is an Console Fader Channel it will change the actual level of the fader In addition VMIX and Console Channels will present an On Off button for turning the channel on or off Finally if the destination is a Console Fader Channel right clicking in the middle of the meter will cause the meter to show program buss assignments which can also be changed O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 151 Right clicking again will return to the normal meter state Meters can also be closed by positioning the mouse to the top of the meter This will cause a close box to float down Clicking that close box will close the meter Git The meters provide quick and easy monitoring of metering and levels in your Axia system Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 152 In addition right clicking on a GPIO route point in the list view of a GPIO Router will present a GPIO panel for the source and destination involved in the GPIO route This is essentially metering for GPIO and allows you to see the status of GPIs and GPOs It will also allow you to trip some GPIs and GPOs when possible using the buttons below the status panels GPIs are always listed on top and GPOs are on the bottom The line between the source and destination shows the active route between GPI on the source port and GPO on the destination port 3 GPIO x PS IO GPO 1 PS I0 GPO 3 Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp P
239. r license These include buttons labels and clocks These are available to all PathfinderPC users In addition Pathfinder Pro users will have a meter control and a web browser control and a MeterFader control which adds gain and console control features If you are a PathfinderPC user not Pro and you install the panel designer to a machine other than the server these additional controls may appear as well But they will only be usable in running panels if the panel is O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 168 connected to a PathfinderPro server Each Panel gets stored to a unique file and becomes a single user panel available to the PathfinderPC Client and Server Buttons and Labels may be added to the panel by dragging the control from the left hand toolbox to the user panel being created Arranging controls on the form Once a control is dropped into the panel it becomes fixed on the form In order to move a control click the control to select it and then right click on the handle around the control The mouse pointer icon will switch to the move pointer and allow you to drag the control around the screen Using the shift and or control keys you can select multiple controls and then right click the handle of any one of them to move all of them as a group In order to resize the control click on it to select it and then left click and drag the handles Again if you select multiple controls you can resize all of them simulta
240. r parent window as desired The window menu allows the user to bring a particular window to the forefront or to arrange the windows automatically within the parent window There are several columns in the routing grid The lock icon shows whether the point is locked or unlocked Next is the name of the source name involved in the routing point If the router is a Livewire Audio router there will be an audio icon which shows whether audio is present on the source Next is the Destination name in the route point Again if the router is a Livewire Audio router there will be an audio icon which shows whether audio is present on the destination A green dot shows that audio is present A red dot shows clipping and a grey dot shows audio absent If no dot is present it signifies that the route point does not support audio metering One exception is that at this point in time Axia windows driver sources and destinations do not support metering but will still be displayed as grey dots Next there will be a column which shows the destination s ordinal number in the router The eye column shows the status of any silence detection events A blank field means that the route point is not involved in any silence O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 149 detection A P means that the route is connected to the Primary source A B means that the route is connected to the Backup source An F means that the point h
241. rSt 001 053 CR Monitor ON PowerSt 001 053 gt VMIX 1 in 1 ON PowerSt 001 053 Preview ON PowerSt 001 053 gt VMIX 1 in 2 ON PowerSt 001 053 Pgm 2 ON PowerSt 001 053 gt WMIX 1 in 3 ON PowerSt 001 053 a sa_s r_01 ON satestserver gt VMIX 1 in 4 ON Powe sa_server_01 ON satestserver gt VMIX 1 in 5 ON PowerSt 001 053 e Find l i SHOBOX 02 02 ON sa showbox 02 gt 2 in 1 ON PowerSt 001 0 e Current r All 12 0 0 Com sa_server_14 ON satestserver gt VMIX 2 in 2 ON PowerSt 001 053 Router Routers SHOBOX 02 15 ON sa showbox 02 gt VMIX 2 in 3 ON PowerSt 001 0 None gt VMIX 2 in 4 ON PowerSt 001 053 O VMX 2 in 5 None gt VMIX 2 in 5 ON PowerSt 001 053 VMX 3 in 1 PC 17 ON satestserver gt VMIX 3 in 1 ON PowerSt 001 053 af SHOBOX 02 06 VMX 3 in 2 SHOBOX 02 06 ON sa showbox 02 gt VMIX 3 in 2 ON PowerSt 001 0 Alsace TAITEN IP AC OM nntan namene gt UMV 2 in DAM ne Nna nea The meter bridge window may be enlarged and meters added removed and reorganized Right clicking on the grid will add additional meters to the meter bridge The meters may also have some additional controls depending on the type of source or destination they are controlling If the gain can be changed on the source or destination a circular fader will be present next to the meter which will allow these changes If the IO is a node IO this will change the gain on the node If it is a VMIX it will change the VMIX fade
242. rating systems such as Windows 2000 and Windows XP have a limit as to the number of simultaneous incoming connections they will accept Therefore if you are going to have more than 10 clients PathfinderPC Client PathfinderPC Mini accessing the PathfinderPC Server application at the same time you must use a Server operating system such as Windows 2003 server Windows 2008 Server or Windows 2012 Server In addition some of the workstation operating systems have added a security feature that limits the number of outgoing connections to devices that can occur in any short period of time This means in an Axia environment if the server application needs to connect to more than 6 Axia devices on the network and there is any chance that those devices might not be reachable XP should not be used for the PathfinderPC Server operating system Due to these restrictions it is highly recommended that Microsoft 2003 Server Microsoft 2008 Server or Microsoft 2012 server is used as the host operating system for PathfinderPC Server It is also recommended that the machine have at least 512 MBytes of RAM If the clustering option is to be used at least 2 NIC cards should be used and we recommend using 4 See the section in this document on clustering for details PathfinderPC Server as opposed to PRO is restricted in the number of clients it can accept and the number of devices it can control Because of these restrictions this version will run adequa
243. re still critical The following is a quick explanation of the critical data files in the PathfinderServer folder e Databases o ServRouters mdb This stores the list of routers It also stores version information for cluster synchronization the users table memory slot values and unique identifiers for RemoteByPort and ByPin routers o ProtocolTrans mdb This stores the information for each protocol translator in the system Events mdb This stores all of the standard events in the system o Numbered Databases 1 mdb There will be a numbered database for each router in the system This database holds the sources destinations router states and snapshots scenes for the given router The number will match the ID number from the ServRouters Database which is also shown in the main router tab of the application It is important to note that the ServRouters mdb database contains a field for each router that has the full file path to the database record If you are moving from a 32 bit to 64 bit operating system these records will need to be updated in the ServRouters database so that these fields point to the Program Files x86 folder instead of the Program Files folder e Cluster xml This file holds the clustering information for a server If you change the ip address of the server this file must be updated to represent the new ip addresses e Server inf This holds information regarding the current state of some of the menu item checkb
244. rences Menu Silence Threshold The silence threshold sets the audio level threshold that will be used for any silence detection events It also defines the threshold that will cause the metering bubbles in the client to display green for Audio Present Clipping Threshold The clipping threshold sets the audio level threshold that will be used to determine if clipping is occurring in the system Set Threshold x amp Set Threshold x Silence Threshold Log Settings See the Logging section of this document for an explanation Log to File See the Logging section of this document for an explanation Log to TCP Port 5400 See the Logging section of this document for an explanation Log to UDP Syslog See the Logging section of this document for an explanation Remember Memory Slots between Restarts If this option is set the state of memory slots used in stacking events will be remembered between restarts of the PathfinderPC Server Help Menu Help Displays this help file Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 45 About PathfinderPC Server Displays the opening splash screen which includes the version information for PathfinderPC Server Axia udio corm Ver 4 54 RC10 A A TELOS COMPANY PATHFINDER 216 241 7225 J E R Vv E K Copyright 2004 Software Authority Inc and Telos Syst Select List Throughout
245. ription of the destination Host IP The IP address of the host that serves the destination Host Name The name of the host that serves the destination Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 229 Host Port The hosts s internal identifier for the destination Stream State The state of the livewire stream routed to this destination Example BeginList DestinationDetailsStat 1 2011 01 25_09 19 26_001 Avail ID Name Description HostIP HostName HostPort Stream State O 105 PSIODST1 PSIO DST 1 ON PSIO 001 055 172 16 1 55 PSIO 001 055 1 STREAM DOWN O 106 PSIODST2 PSIODST2ON PSIO 001 055 172 16 1 55 PSIO 001 055 2 STREAM DOWN 17 StackEventChildren Returns a list of available stack event qualifiers and actions This command is designed for and used by the stack event editor application Command GetList StackEventChildren Example GetList StackEventChildren Return Columns Availability ID StackEventChild ID Name The name of the qualifier or action Description The description of the qualifier or action Type Q A or B for Qualifier Action or Both XMLName The name of the XML element which will be used to store the qualifier or action Example BeginList StackEventChildren 2011 01 25 _09 19 02_001 Avail ID Name Description Type XMLName O 1 Route Triggers from or makes aroute B Route 0 2 Silence Detect Triggers from a specific length of silence on a given LW channel Q Silence 0 3 Audio Clipping Tr
246. rolling devices that need to use the PathfinderPC Server protocol translator system and need to do that in a cluster aware manner These applications are called Software Authority Generic Bridge and Software Authority ACU 1 Prophet Version Bridge and are described in detail later in this document VMIX Control The VMIXControl application provides an on screen mixing application which controls the 40 Channel virtual mixer in each Axia Mix Engine An Administrator can define which Mix engine and VMIX faders the user may use and basic mixing can be accomplished on screen This application is only available to PathfinderPC Pro users SAPortRouter The SAPortRouter application is a serial data routing application which allows the user to dynamically route textual data between serial and TCP ports It runs as a service and allows a user to create Serial TCP Client TCP Server and GPO driver ports Data from any of these ports can then be routed to any of the other ports This is known as the Software Authority Port Router application This application is only available to PathfinderPC Pro users Multicast Gpio Service Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 11 This service provides direct access to multicast gpio closures on the network without having to use physical devices This allows Pathfinder to react to and trigger console events that are tied to specific multicast Gpio channel numbers All of these PathfinderPC tools com
247. run as its own application Panen hhh Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 183 PathfinderPro VMIX Control Overview VMIX Control is a mixer application that is designed to provide the user with a software mixer that can be run on any PC in a network and controls an Axia Engine s virtual mixer At this point in time this application does not control any of the actual Element surface itself Rather each Axia mix engine also contains a virtual 40 channel mixer that is divided into 8 five channel submixers This virtual mixer can be used to create background submixes or to automate mixing processes using PathfinderPC Stack Events It can also be controlled by the VMIX Control application VMIX Control is not designed to replace an Element The Axia engine VMixer is a simple mixer only It does not support the automatic backfeed generation eq processing monitoring and many of the other advanced features required for a true control room environment However for environments where all that is required is simple mixing procedures it becomes an incredibly useful tool and one that we hope to build on in the future Furthermore it can work from anyplace that has TCP access to both PathfinderPro and the Axia mix engine So with proper network security this application can easily be used for remote mixing over the Internet VMIX Control requires TCP access to both PathfinderPro Server and an Axia Mix Engine in order to func
248. s in a router in the system Aliases destadd dstadd da Command GetList DestinationAddress lt RouterNumber gt lt DestinationNumber gt If DestinationNumber is blank returns all Addresses for the Router Example GetList DestinationAddress 1 Return Columns Availability ID Pathfinder ID Location For Virtual Routers this will contain the Destination s mapping to base routers For Axia Routers this will contain the IP Address of the host device and a slash with the port number 172 16 1 3 5 For all other Routers this will just be empty Example BeginList DestinationAddress 1 2007 07 14_13 15 22 001 Avail ID Location 0 1 127 16 1 3 1 0 2 127 16 1 3 2 EndList 13 SourceDetails Returns Details about the Sources in a Router Command GetList SourceDetails lt RouterNumber gt Example GetList SourceDetails 1 Return Columns Availability Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 227 ID Pathfinder ID Name The name of the source Description The description of the source Host IP The IP address of the host that serves the source Host Name The name of the host that serves the source Host Port The hosts s internal identifier for the source Axia Channel The Axia Livewire channel number of the source if applicable Axia Stream IP The Axia Livewire multicast stream address of the source if applicable If the router is an Axia GPIO router this column will contain the IPA
249. s that service and instruct it to play files that are local on that machine or issue commands for text to speech This is designed to allow audible warnings to be activated Enter the IP address of the PC that is running the SAAudioPlay service Enter a file path for a wave file to play or a block of text to be read into the Play field Enter the UserName and Password to be used with the SAAudioPlay service Name Audio Playback B Description ti _i Ci C Text To Speech T oy ll eT a Move Up Move Down Cut Copy Paste Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 103 Generate Log Message This Action allows a custom log message to be generated Select a severity for the custom message User log messages can have a message ID between 9000 and 9099 Enter meaningful data in the Message Source Remote Device and Message fields as desired This will then generate a log message in PathfinderPC Servers logging system if logs are enabled when the action is executed Message Type ID Message Source Remote Device Message Move Up PattinderPC Server Custom Si Fri process has apeblem A Move Down Cut Copy Paste Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 104 Gain Change This action will change the gain of a source or destination on the network Depending on the type of source or destination selected this may
250. s the GPIO circuit on the GPIO port above that will be used in the software to hardware map This GPIO port and circuit then acts like the software button The GPO will be closed when the button state is On and closing the GPI will do the same function as pressing the software button Once the GPIO Port and GPIO Circuit properties are both entered the HWMapAxiaSysName will automatically be filled in accordingly UserPanel Module Defines the Panel ID within the Element Console to address This number can be determined by telnetting to the IP address of the element CPU on Port 4010 and tapping several of the buttons For Example Open a command prompt on the windows PC and type Telnet IPAddress 4010 Telnet 172 168 2 3 4010 Press Enter This should open a Telnet session with the CPU Now tap several of the user panel buttons You should see messages that look like EVENT MOD_USER 3 BUT 6 KEY DOWN EVENT MOD_USER 3 BUT 6 KEY UP The Module number is the one after the first sign In this case 3 So 3 would be the number to enter in the UserPanel Module field UserPanel Button Identifies the number of the button on the panel to map to the software control The bottom button is 1 and they count up to the top of the panel Thus on a ten button panel the top button is ten Once the UserPanel Module and UserPanel Button properties are both entered the HWMapAxiaSysName will automatically be filled in accordingly O S
251. s to modify the look and size of the numbers Element Hands Defines whether the clock hands should be simple black lines or look more like the clock hands on the Axia Element Console screen O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 182 PathfinderPC Mini PathfinderPC Mini is a small application that displays a specified user panel as its own application It should be used in situations where the PathfinderPC Administrator only wants the user to have access to the routes and control offered by a specific user panel and nothing else To use PathfinderPC Mini the administrator needs to complete the details in a small configuration file stored in the PathfinderPC Mini installation folder This file is called PFMiniConfig txt Open this file with any text editor It should look something like this PrimaryServerIP 172 16 1 3 PrimaryServerPort 5200 BackupServerIP 172 16 1 1 BackupServerPort 5200 PanelName Studio_1 UserName Admin UserPassword Admin Change the Server IP Addresses for the PathfinderPC Server and a second clustered server if desired Also enter the name of the Panel to be displayed If you have changed or created specific user accounts within PathfinderPC Server you may also need to enter a valid user name and password Save the file and launch PathfinderPC Mini As long as the application can find the server and finds the Panel within the Server s PFSPanels folder the panel will be displayed and
252. sabled 0 depending on which options are selected On Z No Change On Og U Mute Y No Change On py Fader Gain Y No Change 0 0 F Preview Y No Change On E Talk To Studio Z No Change On G Move Up Move Dowr Cut Copy Paste Console options note some of these will only function with Element version 3 0 and or Fusion e Source Profile Load a specific source profile e Program 1 through 4 Turn program busses on or off on the selected fader e On Turn a fader on or off e Mute Mute a fader e Fader Gain Change the fader level e Preview Turn the Preview on or off e Talk to Studio Turn the fader s talk to studio option on or off e Talk to Preview Turn the fader s talk to preview option on or off e Talk to Control Room Turn the fader s talk to control room option on or off e Talkback Turn the fader talkback on or off e Soft A B Fusion Only Turn the Fusion s A or B soft button on or off e Monitor Section Soft A B C D Fusion only Turn Fusion s monitor section soft button A B C or D on or off e IFB Livewire Channel IFB Channel number e IFB Livewire Engaged Engage IFB Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 102 Audio Playback PathfinderPC Pro has a service that can be installed on any windows PC that will play audio files and or perform text to speech The audio service currently only works on the primary sound device on the machine This action will addres
253. sed on the conditions on startup Some events should not be automatically run on startup and should instead wait for the first change after startup Most of the time this item should be selected however Actions if met Displays the number of Actions that will be run if the qualifier conditions are met Delayed Actions If Met Displays the number of Delayed Actions that will be run if the qualifier conditions are met Millisecond delay Select the amount of delay before running the delayed actions Reevaluate qualifiers before executing delayed actions if met Select whether the delayed actions should be skipped if the qualifiers are not longer True at the end of the delay countdown Actions if not met Displays the number of Actions to be run if the qualifier conditions are not met Delayed Actions if not met Displays the number of Delayed Actions that will be run if the qualifier conditions are not met Millisecond delay Select the amount of delay before running the delayed actions Reevaluate qualifiers before executing delayed actions if not met Select whether the delayed actions should be skipped if the qualifiers are True at the end of the delay countdown The fields for each event in the list may be viewed or edited appropriately The Copy Cut Paste and Move links allow you to copy cut paste or move events in the list at the right The order of stack events in the group
254. select whether the search scope should be the current router or all routers on the server The software will then open the search results window Search Result Window Router Name ME Search Results Destinations Found Destination EAk Description Axia Audio Axia Audio Router Name DST 1 DST 1 Sources Found Destination 1 CD 1 ON DanLiveAudio gt DST 8 CD 1 ON DanLiveAudio gt DST Description Axia Audio Axia Audio Axia Audio Axia Audio Router Name Scene Name DST 1 None DST 1 None Scenes Found Description 8 CD 1 ON DanLiveAudio gt DST 0 CD 1 ON DanLiveAudio 1 CD 1 ON DanLiveAudio gt DST 0 CD 1 ON DanLive Audio Axia Audio 1to8 The search results show the sources destinations and scenes which match the search criteria Selecting a particular source or destination point and clicking done will highlight that point on the routing grid if that particular router is open O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 160 Scheduling The event scheduling window can show event by date or by type Double click 3 Event Selection a particular P November 2004 date to show events which pertain to a particular date Double Click the date to view the Events for a particular date Show Events e B i Done C By Event Type The type 3 Event Selection event window will Audio GPIO list the events
255. sh 5 StackEvents file refresh in queue gt gt StackEvents Refreshing At 2014 02 03T 13 02 55 05 00 gt gt StackEvents Alias for StackEngine Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 213 StackSourceTimerCount This command returns the number of active audio stack event timers on sources It can be useful in debugging Example gt gt StackSourceTimerCount StackSourceTimerCount 3 gt gt Subscribe This command subscribes to certain memory and silence alarm changes in the system It requires certain arguments The valid commands which may be sent are Subscribe Memory Subscribe Silence All Subscribe Silence Changes Subscribe Silence lt IPAddress gt Subscribe Gpiochanges All Subscribe Gpiochanges lt RouterNumber gt Subscribe FileLoads Subscribe IOStateChanges All Subscribe IOStateChanges lt RouterNumber gt Subscribe Vmixstate All Subscribe Vmixgain All Where lt IPAddress gt is the ip address of a device whose silence alarm changes you want to see And lt RouterNumber gt is the number of the router you wish to subscribe to changes on This command will cause the appropriate changes to be sent out when they happen to this control session The subscribe silence commands will only display silence alarm messages for sources and destinations that are being monitored by the system through displayed client audio bubbles audio level stack events or other silence alarm events If the system does not have an a
256. slator TCP Protocol Translator Listening Hot Listening Event System Running Event System Standby PathfinderServer A PathfinderServer B Clustering Communications The first of these applications is the Software Authority Generic Bridge The Generic bridge application passes all data to and from the serial port to whatever TCP connection can be established with the PathfinderPC Servers The second of these applications is the Software Authority ACU 1 Bridge This bridge works in the same manner as the Generic Bridge except that it is optimized for the Sine Systems ACU 1 Prophet version protocol This protocol is very verbose with polling commands every 20 milliseconds To reduce this traffic this bridge application uses a much less verbose event driven system to maintain the status between the PathfinderPC Servers and the bridge Then the bridge application stores the correct responses for the polls and answers the polls on the serial port directly rather than forwarding each poll request on to the servers The ACU version also O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 240 has a screen that shows detailed information about the current state of the VMIX GPI and GPO channels involved in the ACU translation To use either bridge download the appropriate installer msi file from the Software Authority web site and install it on the machine that is to handle the bridge application This can be a dedicated computer or in many cases it can
257. slator is closed It Commands may be entered in the Wake and Sleep fields If the may be enabled manually or with a stack protocol translator sees the Wake command enter the system it will event immediately switch to enabled and begin passing commands to PathfinderPC Server again If it sees the special sleep command it E it may Hessel Lea sleepiie mode will immediately switch back into the sleep state If sleeping then the translator is open and aces puns pone cons DUO Using the keyword REGEX a regex may also be used in these fields passing the data through to the PathfinderPC Server Engine REGEX MyRegex The Status Priority defines whether gpio and route states are placed into a queue for delivery Low or sent immediately High Supported Translators Software Authority Protocol The Software Authority Protocol is a simple text based protocol for controlling any of the routers set up in PathFinderPC Server This is one of the most simple and versatile control protocols in the system for controlling PathfinderPC resources as it is designed specifically for PathfinderPC It has help available by typing a question mark and all commands are basic text commands Appendix A and B of this manual describe this protocol and its commands This translator is often used by automation systems that can send text commands over TCP or Serial to control PathfinderPC routers There is one configuration screen for this translator Soft
258. source AirChain_1 1 AirChain_1 ON DanL 172 16 1 201 and destinatio n lists Click L L DanLivewire Import to irChain_ irChain_ 16 1 DanLivewire import the route points into the virtual router Records may be sorted by any column by clicking the column header The Remove Route button removes a routing point from the router A good way to create a Virtual subset of an existing router is to import all of the routes from the router into the new virtual router and then remove the points that are not desired Multiple sequential routes may be removed by clicking the top point to be removed then holding the shift key while clicking the bottom route Once the routes to be removed are selected click Remove Routes Right clicking on a point and dragging it to the desired position reorders the List The Add Route and Edit Route buttons display the View Virtual route window Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 157 This is the window where the ViewVirtualRoutes Literal Sources included in this Virtual Source may be edited and defined Each Patch Point Description Virtual point is made up of any Axia Audio ON DanLiveAudio specifics for a given virtual route number of actual points from other routers These points are listed in the list at the top of the screen Router Name Axia Audio Router Source SRC 3 7 Change Add Source Remove Source Source Vir
259. ssign column for any log message of the correct Group Type 2101 Log Item Name Group Type Edit Groups ConnectMessage Disconnect_PortClosedRemotely Disconnect_Timeout Disconnect_Normal ConnectAttempt ConnectSucceeded ConnectFailed LoginFailure RouterDeviceReceivedCommand RouterEvents RouteChanged DefinitionChanged GPiChange Router Device Router Device Router Device Router Device Router Device Router Device Router Device Router Device Router Device Router Device ad Router Device Router Device Router Device High Custom Apply Using these methods you can customize your logging messages to your facility s individual needs Next we will list and describe all of the log message sections and their underlying messages This next section will also list an ID number for each message This is the ID number used to uniquely identify the particular type of log message in the logs and can be used when analyzing the log to find certain kinds of events The ID Numbers are all 4 digit numbers and the first number represents the master section of log message For example all messages that fall under the Connect Message section are between 1000 and 1999 All messages that fall under the RouterEvents section get IDs in the range between 3000 and 3999 ConnectMessage Section ID 1000 to 1999 This section of messages logs connect and disconnect events to pieces of gear within the
260. st AxiaUserModules lt Device IP gt Example GetList AxiaUserModules 172 16 1 53 Return Columns Availability ID ID of the Module Name Module Name Type Type of module Example BeginList AxiaUserModules 172 16 1 53 2011 01 25_09 19 02_001 Avail ID Name Type o 1 USER 1 User10 0 2 USER 2 User10 O 1 ACCESS 1 Accessory Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 232 22 AxiaUserButtons Returns a list of Axia User Buttons available on a specific device This may or may not be based on actual data from the equipment at this point in time but is used to populate lists in the stack event editor Command GetList AxiaUserButtons lt Device IP gt Example GetList AxiaUserButtons 172 16 1 53 Return Columns Availability ID ID of the Button Name Button Name Type Type of button or display Example BeginList AxiaUserButtons 172 16 1 53 2011 01 25_09 19 02_001 Avail ID Name Type 0 1 BUT 1 UserButton 0 2 BUT 2 UserButton 0 3 BUT 3 UserButton O 18 DISP Display 23 AxiaUserButtonHosts Returns a list of Axia Hosts that support user buttons Command GetList AxiaUserButtonHosts Example GetList AxiaUserButtonHosts Return Columns Availability ID ID of the host Name Name of the host IP IP address of the host Type Type of host Example BeginList axiauserbuttonhosts 2011 01 25 _09 20 02_001 Avail Name IP Type O PowerSt 001 053 172 16 1 53 PowerStation 24 ConsoleFa
261. stem Some customers have mistakenly tried to make multiple Axia audio routers with the sets of equipment they wish to see This is not the proper way to set up the system Usually you want one Audio router which encompasses all of the Axia Livewire sources and destinations so that any source can easily be routed to any destination using the PathfinderPC software Virtual Routers may then be used to make subsets of these sources and destinations for individual rooms or users The only situation where it is advisable for there to be multiple Axia Audio routers in a PathfinderPC Server system is if the server is addressing multiple disparate locations where the routing between the locations does not have full routing bandwidth All of the routers listed above will be considered throughout this document as Real routers Real routers are to be differentiated from virtual routers A real router is defined as a router in the PathfinderPC System that directly communicates with the physical routing hardware in the system Virtual routers on the other hand are a special kind of router that only exists within PathfinderPC They are used to create subsets and supersets of the physical route points within the system For example a virtual router could be used to display only a select number of Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 20 route points in an overall system that pertains to a specific room The Administrator could define a router for a
262. stering IP address We will call this ServerA and the other server ServerB In the case that ServerA goes down or the PathfinderPC Server application on that machine is terminated ServerB becomes the only active member of the cluster and will then take over the Event System role Thus it is absolutely critical that each server be able to determine if the other has PathfinderPC Server running and operational This is why we recommend supplying redundant paths of communication for the clustering data This ensures that if one of the clustering NIC cards or cables is severed or goes down for some reason the servers can still communicate Otherwise both Servers will think the other has gone down and both will start trying to execute events in the event system leading to duplicate events The event system includes both standard events and stacking events It is possible to create a PathfinderPC cluster with fewer that 4 NIC cards For one thing if the business network does not need to be connected directly to the PathfinderPC Server then that NIC card can be eliminated In addition you can set the Axia network to double for backup clustering communications and therefore remove the need for one of the cross connect cards in each server In this case only two NIC cards in each server would be necessary Axia Network Pathfinder Server A Pathfinder Server B While the first design is preferred this design is also acceptable Creating a cluster When
263. stination 1 and the source to Source 2 This will make the route from the Talkback Source to the Headphone Destination whenever the button is pressed HE DemoEventGroup StackingEventEditor Actions If Not Met 0 Delayed Actions If Not Met 0 Delay Sseconds _ Move Up Move Down Cut Copy Paste Add Edt Remove Next drag the Route action to the Actions if not met list to make a copy of it there Finally change the source to Source 1 in this action if not met route action O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 71 Ei DemoEventGroup StackingEventEditor This will return the route whenever the button is not down as the qualifier dictates Click OK on the event and Group screen to commit the changes to the server Thus when the button is pushed the talkback source will be routed to the headphone destination and when it is released the program content will be sent to the destination Endless Loops One thing that must be kept in mind when creating stack events is that there currently is no logic within PathfinderPC Server to prevent an endless loop For example SES NES O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 72 StackEvent B Qualifiers RouteStatus Router 1 Source2 is routed to Destination 1 Action ActivateRoute Router 1 Route Source 1 to Destinatio
264. system For example these messages will create log entries if the server is having difficulty communicating with a particular Axia node The server uses a heartbeat with each piece of equipment in the system and will try to disconnect and reconnect with the unit if the heartbeat fails or the port is closed Disconnect_PortClosedRemotely ID 1001 Group Type RouterDevice Description This message indicates that the TCP connection to the remote device was closed by the remote device O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 122 Disconnect_Timeout ID 1002 Group Type RouterDevice Description This message indicates that there was a timeout waiting for a valid response from the remote device Disconnect_Normal ID 1003 Group Type RouterDevice Description PathfinderPC Server has disconnected from the remote device as a normal part of Operations ConnectAttempt ID 1004 Group Type RouterDevice Description PathfinderPC Server is attempting to connect to a Router device ConnectSucceeded ID 1005 Group Type RouterDevice Description PathfinderPC Server has successfully established a connection with the specified device ConnectFailed ID 1006 Group Type RouterDevice Description PathfinderPC Server was unable to establish a connection to the specified Router Device LoginFailure ID 1007 Group Type RouterDevice Description The remote device has re
265. t Turning on the latching property makes the PathfinderPC Server handle the state switching of the button automatically each subsequent time it is pressed Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 75 This shows the huge possibilities for advanced and simple events that are possible through the Stack Event Engine of PathfinderPC Server The next section will step through the parameters that are available through each of the qualifiers and actions in the Stack Event Engine In reality the creative Administrator that takes the time to become acquainted with all of the possible qualifier and action tools in the PatfhfinderPC Server Stack Event arsenal should rarely or ever have the need for custom scripting However in the rare instances where the customized needs would require more advanced logic than can be easily accomplished with these tools PathfinderPC can also access and run custom scripts Contact Axia and or Software Authority if you have need of custom scripting to drop into your PathfinderPC Server installation Functions As we have been working with the editor you may have noticed a button that looks like E This is a function button and will turn the field into a textual field into which you can enter a custom function These functions are much like the functions in Excel and are available for the power users that really want to customize their events Functions start with the keyword funct followed by the function name
266. t Timer was enabled ScriptTimerGetAction ID 5030 Group Type Scripts Description The Action that will be run upon a script timer countdown was requested ScriptTimerSetAction ID 5031 Group Type Scripts Description The Action that will be run upon a script timer countdown was set ScriptTimerClear ID 5032 Group Type Scripts Description Cleared a script timer location LicenseExceptionNumClients ID 5034 Group Type None Description More clients than the license allows tried to access this server simultaneously LicenseExceptionNumAxiaDevices ID 5035 Group Type Scripts Description More Axia devices that the license allows are in the system RefreshStackList ID 5036 Group Type None Description The list of stacking events has been refreshed Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 131 StackEventLoadEvent ID 5037 Group Type None Description Stack Event was loaded StackEventRemoveEvent ID 5038 Group Type None Description Stack Event was removed from the system GenericClientReturnCmd ID 5039 Group Type None Description Recieved a command from a generic client does not include Pathfinder clients SA_AudioPlayReturnCmd ID 5040 Group Type None Description Received message data from an SAAudioPlay service MemorySlotUtilization ID 5041 Group Type None Description Certain percentages o
267. t be logged at all or ALL which means all events of that type will be logged Selecting a drop down on the section title with the or next to it will set that type of logging for all messages within that section In addition many of the messages have a group type If the Group Type Edit Groups column has a group type name other than None that means that a custom group can be created and selected for items that share that group type For example the Connect messages all have a group type of Router Device If you click in the Group Type Edit Groups column a button will appear that can be selected to create a custom group of the type in the column In this case we are creating a custom group of type Router Device JOE Router Device Clicking the button will open the group editor for Router Devices O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 120 We can now create groups of Router Device objects and give that group a name This group will then be available in the log message selection drop down in addition to the All and None selections in the previous screen You can use this to create a group of specific objects Axia nodes for which you want to collect log information For example let s say you want to log all of the GPI changes that take place on a couple of nodes If in the log settings screen you set logging of GPI changes to ALL every GPI change on the Axia network will get logged Instead you could cr
268. t will bring that window to the front The Cascade menu item will reposition all of the currently open windows within the PathfinderPC Client in a cascading fashion The Tile menu item will reposition all of the currently open windows within the PathfinderPC Client in a tile fashion Help Menu The Help menu item open the help system in PathfinderPC Client Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 165 The About Pathfinder PC menu item opens the splash screen wich displays the version information for the Pathfinder PC Client PathfinderPC Client Registry Settings We have found that many clients do not want their users to have to login when running PathfinderPC Client but still want to restrict their access to particular routers features and panels This restriction can be accomplished by modifying registry settings on the client computer The registry key to edit is HKLM Software Software Authority PathfinderPC ACL All keys are of type DWORD The following keys are available FullAccess 0 or 1 This is set to 1 by default when the program starts and this registry key does not exist 1 enables full access according to user login rights if enabled on server O limits access to the below entries Setting this option to 1 overrides any of the other registry settings listed below Router_ lt RouterName gt 0 or 1 for deny or allow Panel_ lt PanelName gt 0 or 1 for deny or allow VirtualRouterEdit 0 or 1 f
269. tList Version Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 207 This command returns a version stamp for certain lists of system information See the GetList function documentation for details on this command and its usage GetMemorySlot This command returns the value of memory slots by name or by number This command requires an argument You can send the name of the memory slot the number of the memory slot the word All which will return all the memory slots values or the word AllUsed which will return all of the memory slots that currently have a value assigned to them The command au is a valid alias for allused and gms is a valid alias for GetMemorySlot Therefore you can also send gms au to get all of the used memory slots The return command will contain the word Memory slot a space the slot number a tab the slot name another tab and the slot value Example gt gt GetMemorySlot AllUsed MemorySlot0 MySlot MyValue MemorySlot 1 MySlot2 Whatever gt gt GetSourceAddress This command returns the source address for on IO from the database It returns the data as it is stored in the address field of the database Example gt gt GetSourceAddress 1 1 1 CLY DeskMic 172 16 1 55 PSIO 001 055 8 8 1 CLY DeskMic 239 192 21 125 1 gt gt GPIStat lt RouterNumber gt lt IONumber gt This command requests the state of a GPIPoint or all of the GPI points on a GPIO router It returns a GPIStat Comman
270. tart the service Port Types Serial E Serial Port Configuration ID 2 Name MySerial Description My Serial Port Serial Port Number 9 Baud Rate Parity Data Bits Stop Bits End Of Message 0D 0A Initialization Command Enter the serial port settings for the port including a name and description if desired The End Of Message field allows you to enter a command which is expected at the end of each message for the protocol that the port will be using This allows the application to wait until it has a complete message before sending it on to other ports to which this port is routed You can enter non typable characters by using plus a 2 digit ascii hex code So 0D 0A is equivalent to a carriage return and line feed If you leave this blank data will be sent as soon as it is received which will often be on a character by character basis The initialization command if present will be sent each time the port connects or opens One trick that many users use with serial ports is to use a null modem cable and a second port to loop the data For example if you have an application that only understands serial ports you can take that serial port and loop it O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 193 to another port Then run the SAPortRouter application on the second port with a TCP port to convert the serial data to TCP TCPServer EJ TCP Server Configuration ID 2 Name TCPS
271. te drop down for the control You can change the state drop down to on and off to view in the designer how the button will look when it is on or off After changing the state drop down you have to click on another property leave the state property before the change will appear Make sure you leave the state property in the state you wish it to default to when the form is loaded The state is usually used in routing panels to show whether a route exists but when paired with stacking events can be used to show any condition in the system you want Finally double click in the name property and create a name for the button If you are going to define custom roles for the user panel button through stack events the button will be identified in the stack event by PanelName ButtonName You could also drag and drop labels onto the panel Labels are simply textual information that will be displayed in any color you like on the panel So at this point we have a panel that has a named button with a nice caption but the button does not do anything in the system Find the three properties MapRouter MapSource and MapDestination If you enter numbers into these three properties that match the number of a router within Pathfinder as well as the number of a source and destination within that router this button will activate that route when pushed from within PathfinderPC Client and or PathfinderPC Mini To determine what numbers to use in these properties look at the
272. tely on an XP Windows 7 or other Microsoft workstation operating system It is designed for smaller systems Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 13 Version Comparison PathfinderPC versus PathfinderPRO PathfinderPC ships in 2 different versions PathfinderPC and PathfinderPRO PathfinderPC is designed for smaller installs and comes with a single server license PathfinderPro is designed for larger installations ships with 2 Server licenses so that it is immediately ready for clustering and has several additional features and programs Here is a complete feature set comparison Feature PathfinderPC PathfinderPCPro PathfinderPCPro Upgrade Server Licenses 1 2 1 Additional upgrade of existing Server OS Required XP 2003 Server 2003 Server 2003 Server Client Connections Client Mini 10 No limit other than No limit other than CPU CPU speed speed Axia Devices it will Control 25 No limit other than No limit other than CPU CPU speed speed Clustering X X Routers Supported Axia Audio X X X Axia GPIO X X X Virtual X X X SA Port Router X X VideoQuip DS 1224 X X X ZSystems Detangler X X X Sigma X X X NTIVeemux VGA X X X Evertz X X X XI Audio UDP X X Axia IPort Mpeg X X X Pathfinder Remote GPIO BY Port Pin 7 X X Protocol Translators Software Authority Protocol X X X Generic Protocol X
273. terFader control is configured the same way but it adds some additional functionality When the panel executes in PathfinderPC Client or Mini the MeterFader control is intelligent enough to know what kind of source or destination it is connected to Depending on the source or destination s capabilities the control may provide a fader for changing the gain and controls for turning console or VMIX channels on or off Additionally if the MeterFader is tied to an Axia Console Channel right clicking in the fader will present options for changing the program buss assignments These controls work exactly like the meters in PathfinderPC Client that are available by right clicking on a specific route Finally you can use the Web Browser control with a PathfinderPro license to display web pages which may have more dynamic content such as embedded video or audio players In this way you can add to the richness of the user panel Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 173 Property Descriptions IP please Note Typically you must move off of the field you are editing to a different field before the changes will be stored into the panel configuration memory Panel Properties Type Defines the object type as main panel and cannot be changed by the designer Name Defines the name of the Panel When you save the Panel this name will automatically be set to the name of the file less the file type extension Also setti
274. text within the button This cannot be changed for button controls State Sets the state of the button to On or Off The BackcolorOn and Off will follow this state change OnClick Used to run customized scripts and scripting commands when the button is clicked See the scripting documentation for details of commands that can be used in this field OnMouseDown Used to run customized scripts and scripting commands when the button is pushed down See the scripting documentation for details of commands that can be used in this field OnMouseUp Used to run customized scripts and scripting commands when the button is released See the scripting documentation for details of commands that can be used in this field Picture_Up_On Defines a picture to be used in the button when the button is up and the State is On In order for pictures to be used they must be located either in the network share defined by the Panel Form s Default Graphics Path or within the PanelGraphics folder within each PathfinderPC Client s or PathfinderPC Mini s installation folder You can view the changes to these properties in the designer by assigning a picture and then pressing and releasing the button with the state property either on or off Picture_Up_Off Defines a picture to be used in the button when the button is up and the State is Off In order for pictures to be used they must be located either in the network share defined by the Panel Form s
275. the Events button on the Route Control toolbar See the section earlier above and in the PathfinderPC Server section on events creation and editing The Exit menu item will close the PathfinderPC Server application Please be aware that at this point in time PathfinderPC Server is not a service The application must be running for PathfinderPC Server to be operational Routers Menu The Routers menu item lists the routers that are in the system Clicking any Router in the list under this menu will open that router in the client The Create Virtual Router and Edit Virtual Router menu items will open the virtual router creation wizard See the Virtual Router section above for details on creating and editing virtual routers The Show Virtual Router Details menu item can be turned on or off If this option is turned on and a virtual router is open there will be a section at the bottom of the list view of the virtual router This will fill with data about the base routes involved in any virtual route selected in the router Proc Output None None gt sa_server_02 ON satests None gt sa_server_03 ON sate None gt sa_server_04 ON satests None gt sa_server_05 ON sate None gt sa_server_06 ON satests None gt sa_server_07 ON satests RouterN ame Source Dan udio 2 sa _server_01 Proc Dutput 1 For any route selected in the virtual router that is selected this will show the base routers sources and destinations invo
276. the next 10 years Onward and upward Marty Sacks Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 9 PATHFINDER PC o Pra Documentation Overview The PathFinderPC software is a Client Server Router control software package It is designed to provide facility wide control over any number of Audio Video and Machine Control routers including the Axia Livewire distributed routing system At the time of this writing the package supports the Axia Livewire products ZSystems 64X64 and 128X128 Detanglers the VideoQuip DS1224 machine control router NTI VGA Router the Sigma Series of routers and Evertz Routers In addition we also have a Software Authority Port Routing application that can be controlled by PathfinderPC Server which allows Serial to TCP conversion and routing The PathfinderPC software suite is actually several different applications PathfinderPC Server The PathfinderPC Server system is configured using intuitive wizards to inform the system about routers that are connected to the system and to modify the names of route points in the system PathfinderPC Server also includes the following additional features 1 User database which an Administrator may use to control access to certain functions and routing lists in the system 2 An integrated event system to provide system and routing changes at specific times or based on silence detection and or GPIO triggers 3 Amore advanced Stacking Event System which allows an Administrator to create
277. the software panel color and hardware panel button color look the way you want them to Because of the button backlighting the same RGB color settings do not always look exactly the same between the hardware and software button Again remember that we could also leave all of the hardware map and MapRouter Source Destination fields blank and instead use stack events to define the button behavior In that case create a stack event group and stack event or series of stack events Fill in the UserPanelButton qualifier entering the PanelName ButtonName for the button name and the properties of the button that will trigger the event such as MouseDown equivalent to pressing the button Then in the Action section we could create a route action and a user panel action that would change the route and change the color and caption of the button on the fly Or we could do both We could define mapped routes but also use stack events on the same buttons to change its captions or flashing state In this manner the user panels can be designed to accomplish an infinite array of custom tasks in a button package that is simple for the end user to use and understand See the Stack Event section of this document for more details on using Panel Controls with Stack Events You will also notice that some of the properties are picture properties PathfinderPC Server will not serve out pictures but the client applications will look in specific places for the graphic files
278. this document for instructions if these do not already exist Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 60 In this example our qualifier is the GPI contact closure and the actions are a route change action and an email action From the PathfinderPC Server select the Stack Events Tab and click add to add a new Event Group GPIEvent StackingEventEditor Delayed Actions f Met Re evaluate qualifiers before executing delayed actions if met E Actions If Not Met Mitsecond dey as El Re evaluate qualifiers before executing delayed actions if not met E Move Up Move Down Cut Copy Paste When the Stack Event editor appears enter a name for the group and click Add to create a new event within the group Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 61 EE DemoEventGroup StackingEventEditor Name aer DemoEvent Other Details x E Description Qualifiers 0 Logic All vj Qualifier Details Open Palette v Name Type Description Nane E Description Actions If Met 0 Delayed Actions If Met 0 Delay 5 seconds gt Actions If Not Met 0 Delayed Actions If Not Met 0 Delay 5 seconds gt Move Up Move Down Cut Copy Paste Lv y Et Remove When the event editing window appears as shown above enter a name for the event and click Add and select qualifi
279. tion This is slightly different from other Pathfinder client applications which only require a TCP connection to the Pathfinder server VMIX control requires a TCP connection to both PathfinderPro Server and to the Axia Mix Engine It will only function when connected to a PathfinderPro server Licensing The VMIXControl application requires a connection to a licensed PathfinderPro server running version 4 20 or later to function Like PathfinderPC and Mini it can be installed on as many computers in the network as you like as long as it is used with a valid PathfinderPro server Installation To install VMIXControl simply double click the VMIXControl installer Please note that this application requires that the computer already have the Net framework version 2 0 installed Most XP Vista 2003 machines will already have this If the framework is not present it can be downloaded and installed through the Windows update system O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 184 E VMIXControl Welcome to the VMIXControl Setup Wizard The installer will guide you through the steps required to install YMI Control on your computer WARNING This computer program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized duplication or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil or criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law Can
280. trol the routing of the ports dynamically Please Note At this point in time only ASCII data is supported Licensing The SAPort Router requires a PathfinderPro license to function This license is entered into the system using the configuration UI However SAPortRouter may be installed on multiple computers using that license Installation To install SAPortRouter simply double click the SAPortRouter installer Please note that this application requires that the computer already have the Net framework version 2 0 installed Most XP Vista 2003 Windows7 machines will already have this If the framework is not present it can be downloaded and installed through the windows update system Vista and Windows users please see the Vista notes at the end of this document about UAC when installing this service E SAPortRouterService a Welcome to the SAPortRouterSeryice Setup Wizard The installer will guide you through the steps required to install SAPortRouterService on your computer WARNING This computer program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized duplication or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil or criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law Cancel Click Next and select who will be allowed to use the program Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 191 Se
281. ts Each Matrix consists of a name and a grid with columns and rows A PathfinderPC Server memory matrix is a table in memory with columns and rows To create one Enter a name for the table PathfinderPC Server will then look for a Matrix with the selected name If it cannot find one it will assign the name to the next available Matrix Data is added to a memory Table by entering fields separated by commas Dog Cat Fight Dog Wins Would create a table with 4 columns and would enter the data into the 4 columns If the data were then retrieved in a qualifier row 0 column 0 would return the word Dog Additional rows can also be added Selecting the List checkbox will delete the memory Matrix Selecting the Remove Row check box will try and find a row with all columns left to right that match what is in the Value field and it will delete that row E A Table Name MyTable l Value Value1 Value2 4 Remove Row I Delete List 7 Move Up Move Down So if in the value field you enter Dog Cat All rows that have the first two columns with Dog and Cat will be removed Memory matrixes are also automatically synchronized between clustered servers so that on a failover the server that takes over the event system has the correct information in its memory matrixes Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 99 Run SA Command The SA Command Action runs a S
282. tual Source Name SRC 3 Virtual Source Description SRC 3 ON DanLiveAudio Done Cancel A given route point may only have a single route point making it a direct map to a point on another router But it also may have several router points tied to this single virtual point This allows a single virtual point to include audio video machine control and GPIO points for a given device The Remove Route button removes the selected real route point from the virtual route point list The Router Name and Router Point drop down lists provide access to all of the actual routers and their points Simply select the router and the route point which is to correspond to this Virtual point and then click either Add Source Destination or Change Source Destination to either add a new point or edit the currently selected point The Patch Name is the name of the Virtual Point in the Virtual Router and the description field allows a description to be created for the virtual route point Clicking Done submits the Changes to the configuration The concept of using a Virtual Router to provide an ordered subset of a real router where each point on the virtual router corresponds to an actual point on a real router is fairly simple Some more explanation may be needed to understand why some points in the Virtual Router might have multiple corresponding points though Here is an example VirtualRecordingStudio Inc has three routers They have an audio router
283. u The Route Control menu item displays and hides the Route Control toolbar on the ledt hand side of the screen The Window Preset menu item displays and hides the Window Preset toolbar on the bottom of the screen The Route Information menu item hides and displays a toolbar on the right hand side of the screen that displays additional information about Axia route points which have been selected in the router This information includes such things as host IP terminal names and livewire channel numbers O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 164 Source sa_server_01 Description sa_server_01 ON satestserver TerminallPAddress 172 16 1 254 TerminalN ame satestserver TerminalSources 24 TerminalDestinations 24 SourceNumber 1 SourceName sa_server_01 Channel 25401 LWSAAddress RTPA4ddress 239 Lw SAEnabled ATPAEnabled 1 Destination Proc Output Description Proc Dutput ON Telos default TerminallPAddress 172 16 1 57 TerminalN ame Telos default TerminalS ources 1 TerminalDestinations 1 DestinationNumber 1 DestinationN ame Proc Output View Menu The List menu item presents the currently selected router in List view as described above The Chart menu item presents the currently selected router in Chart view as described above Window Menu The Window menu displays all of the windows that are currently open in the PathfinderPC Client Selecting any of these windows from the lis
284. ute details including both a destination and source point or a scene according to which type of event has been selected Selecting the Override Locks checkbox will force the route to take place regardless of whether locked route points need to be changed to accomplish this goal Click Next again Select the Routing Details for this Event Router DanAudio Destination Channel y j Source None salle Override Locks lt lt Back Next gt gt Finish Cancel Use this screen to schedule when the event should occur Select whether the event should happen once or on a recurring schedule Click Next again 3 Event Wizard Select when this Event should Occur Date 12 20 2010 x Time 10 o0 00 fam zi One Time Only COn the Following Days Sunday Monday Ti Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday pecevenssencenscesceevsncencensensen Cancel R sesssscssesesessscsssesssezecesscer Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 48 Ear a Name and Description forthe x t a i Een Select a Name and Description for this Event Click Finish to add the event O 5 ports Talk Description Change options for ML Sports Show Cancel lt lt Back Next gt gt Finish P pease Note Time based events which occur only once will be deleted out of the events database the day after they have been programme
285. uterDevice Description Logs each command relating to silence and or audio present from the external device Clipping Threshold ID 2003 Group Type RouterDevice Description Logs each command relating to clipping from the external device GPIState ID 2004 Group Type RouterDevice Description Logs each command relating to a GPI state from the external device This includes responses to periodic GPI state polls GPOState ID 2005 Group Type RouterDevice Description Logs each command relating to a GPO state from the external device This includes responses to periodic GPO state polls RouterEvents Section This section of log events describes changes to router states within the PathfinderPC system It will log routing changes and GPIO changes within the system RouteChanged ID 3001 Group Type RouterDevice Description This route has changed from the previously known route to the one specified in this log entry DefinitionChanged ID 3002 Group Type RouterDevice Description Some aspect of the router definition has changed GPIChanged Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 124 ID 3003 Group Type RouterDevice Description The specified GPI state has changed GPOChanged ID 3004 Group Type RouterDevice Description The specified GPO state has changed DeviceStateChanged ID 3005 Group Type RouterDevice Description T
286. values in the hexadecimal format amp HBBGGRR For example amp HOOFFOO would produce green Name JUserButton st a Descriot Button Name MyPanel MyButton E Host IP Button Module z f gt f gt Button Number Set Button Name Button Caption Hello a Back Color On No Change sHooFFOO W si gt Back Color Off No Change jeHsosoFF W gt Button State C No Change CoCo al Flash No Change Con cor Move Up Move Down Cut Copy Paste The Button Name should be used very carefully if ever as it will change the internal running name of the button making it no longer available to the selected Action and or qualifier Use the Button Caption property to change the text on the button not Button Name Button Name does not change the text in the button but rather the actual name of the button within the system You can also change the Button State to On or Off and turn flashing On or Off if desired The button caption text displayed in the button can also be modified using this action Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 95 Send Email Use this action to send an email Please note that in order for this action to work the master email server settings must be configured for the server This is under the File menu settings earlier in this document and can be found under the File menu of PathfinderPC Server As long as the ser
287. ver has the correct Email server settings defined this action will send an email Enter the Address subject and message into the appropriate fields Multiple email addresses may be assigned by creating multiple email Actions or by separating the email addresses by semicolons in the Email Address field The Email address field must be less than 255 characters long Name SendEmail To Me MyDomain com Subject Include Date Time IV Move Up Move Down Cut Run Script Use this action to run a custom script The script file must exist within the PFSScripts Name RunSerpt ME O folder in PathfinderPC Server Script MyScript pfsl a Move Up Move Down Cut Copy Paste Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 96 Protocol Translator Command Me O Command This Action will send a textual message out a Protocol Translator port Select the Translator w eee and enter the command to send PP O MainSAPort gt Escape characters can be used to look for non Command Bowy S typable characters as follows Translator State No Change fempty gt cr Carriage Return lf Line Feed t Tab xx where xx is a hexadecimal number represents an Ascii character of the number represented by xx PFS 3 58 and later only The translator state option allows you to dynamically Enable Disable or Sleep the protocol translator Move Up Move
288. ver should execute the Actions Negate reverses the qualifier state making the qualifier True if the date and time are any time other than the selected range Start Date Start Time End Date End Time Specified Date y 12 17 2010 Specified Date y 12 17 2010 Move Up Move Down Cut Copy Paste BAA E Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 81 Protocol Translator Command Received This qualifier looks for certain textual commands to enter a Protocol Translator For example you could create a Generic translator and have an automation system send text commands to it Then in a Stack Event qualifier select the protocol translator to listen to and the command you are listening for When the command is received the qualifier is considered to be True Escape characters can be used to look for non typable characters as follows cr Carriage Return lf Line Feed t Tab xx where xx is a hexadecimal number that represents an Ascii character of the number represented by xx The translator state option if set to anything other than No Change means that the qualifier will only evaluate as True if the translator is also in the selected Enabled Disabled or Sleep state This property is usually used instead of the command property Name Prot TransCommand Negate E Translator 0 MansAPt y gt i laf Translator State Y No Change emey 7 gt
289. version 1 0 2g or later funct LWCHLoadedToFader lt ElementIP gt lt FaderNum gt Returns the Livewire Channel Number loaded to a physical fader requires element version 2 2 0 9 or later or PowerStation version 1 0 2g or later funct FaderLWCHLoadedTo lt ElementIP gt lt LWCHNumber gt Returns the physical fader number that a Livewire Channel Number is loaded to requires element version 2 2 0 9 or later or PowerStation version 1 0 2g or later funct LWCHLoadedToFaderDest lt Router gt lt Dest gt Returns the Livewire Channel Number loaded to a fader by the fader s Pathfinder Destination Number requires element version 2 2 0 9 or later or PowerStation version 1 0 2g or later funct ProfileNameLoadedToFaderDest lt Router gt lt Dest gt Returns the Source Profile Name loaded to a fader by the fader s Pathfinder Destination Number requires element version 2 2 0 9 or later or PowerStation version 1 0 2g or later funct Profile DLoadedToFaderDest lt Router gt lt Dest gt Returns the Source Profile ID loaded to a fader by the fader s Pathfinder Destination Number requires element version 2 2 0 9 or later or PowerStation version 1 0 2g or later Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 77 StackEvent Qualifiers RouteStatus The RouteStatus qualifier allows you to define a source and destination on a particular PathfinderPC router The stack event
290. very customized event logic 4 A Protocol Translator to provide access to the routing system by automation systems and other controllers which use different protocols An advanced logging system to log events throughout the routing system Serves Custom User Panel definitions to Client applications Provides a scripting engine for custom scripts if needed AAA Clustering so that two servers can run the PathfinderPC Server application and provide failover if one of the servers fails requires two server licenses which are included in a Pathfinder Pro purchase PathfinderPC Client PathfinderPC Client is the application that end users will use to make route changes The interface is simple to use and allows source and destination route changes to be made quickly and easily with a few mouse clicks This client application also includes the following features 1 Three different routing views and methods for viewing and making route changes 2 Simple interface for creating and activating entire scene changes to quickly change multiple routes in the system 3 Ability to lock routes so they may not be changed by another user during a show 4 Search engine for finding sources and destinations within large route tables O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 10 Resource sorting Audio Absent Present and clipping metering Full Metering GPIO viewing and control ON EN Virtual Router Creation to create custom route lists for
291. view that mate rial first In it we explain the ideas that motivated Livewire and how you can use and benefit from it as well as nitty gritty details about wiring connec tors and the like Since Livewire is built on standard networks we also help you to understand general network engineering so that you have the full back ground for Livewire s fundamentals After reading Introduction to Livewire you will know what s up when you are speaking with gear vendors and the network guys that are often hanging around radio stations these days As always we welcome your suggestions for im provement Contact Axia Audio with your com ments Axia Audio a Telos Company 1241 Superior Avenue Cleveland Ohio 44114 USA Phone 1 216 241 7225 Web www AxiaAudio com E Mail Inquiry AxiaAudio com Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 3 Table of Contents OVERVIEW ia iia ill ENIRE 10 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 0 A a a A d 13 PATHFINDERPC CLIENT APPLICATIONS cccccccccnoncncnnnnnnnnnncnnncnnncnnnnononononononononononononnno nono E e EEE EE E ne E a En neis 13 PATHFINDERPC PRO SERVER winnen aeea ea a ae Ea a AEE OaE A a aE EES a E A AES DEEE NEE E E OE EEE aeiae 13 VERSION COMPARISON PATHFINDERPC VERSUS PATHFINDERPRO oocccoccccococcocoocnoocnononononos 14 PATHFINDERPC PRO SERVER INSTALLATION cccsceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneneeeeeeneeeeeesneneeeeeseeeeeeennns 16 PATHFINDERPC PRO LACENSING siessen ee ee aen Ea seal eA ES E n NAE E aa EEEa
292. ware Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 111 Protocol Translator Setup i O xj Select the Routers This Translator will Use JV Use All Routers Including Future Additions Routers To Ignore DanVirtual Finish This is used to define routers whose changes should be posted to this translator PathfinderPC Server has a master port 9500 as defined in the Master TCP IP settings under the file menu that also uses this protocol This means that a translator using this protocol only needs to be created if you need some communications method other than standard TCP If you intend to communicate using this protocol using TCP just connect to port 9500 instead of creating an additional translator Pro Bel General Router and Pro Bel General Switcher Protocol Translators The Pro Bel protocol translators only provide certain basic functions at this time You will want to determine whether the controlling device you will be using with this translator requires the General Router or the General Switcher Protocol For Prophet Router control use the Pro Bel General Router Protocol Also see the section on the SAGenericBridge application for a discussion for how to use this in a clustered system with controllers that can only use a serial port Protocol Translator Setup 0 xj Select the Router This Translator will Control Router DanAudio v Einish Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 112
293. will be analyzed whenever the destination has its source route assignment changed If the source point that is assigned to the destination corresponds to the source in the qualifier the qualifier will be considered True Otherwise it will be considered False Use Lock State 7 Lock a If the Use Lock State as Part of Qualifier is checked the qualifier will only be True if the lock state of the route also matches the lock state of the lock checkbox located beneath this item Negate reverses the qualifier state making the qualifier False if the route conditions are met and True if they are not Move Up Move Down Cut Copy Paste Silence Clipping Level Present e Shares The Audio Level qualifiers allow you to create ME m 4 a condition based on the audio state of a source gt i or destination If the audio is silent or present Negate a or in clipping for more than a certain amount of pp E EN y Router ft DanAudio y 2 time the qualifier is considered to be True Only routers that have audio metering Source y gt capabilities will be available in the router list Destination fempty gt The Timeout defines how long in seconds the Timeout 15 audio state must exist before the qualifier is considered to be True Negate reverses the qualifier state making the qualifier False if the audio conditions are met and True if they are not Move Up Move Down Cut Copy Paste
294. will become available Under the Routers drop down list will be a list of all of the available the Selecting any of these routers will Routers defined on server bring up the appropriate routing list for that router TF Lock EjpathFinderPC nnn File Routers Scenes UserPanels Meter Bridge Toolbars Yiew Window Help Router or User Group Routes C Scenes sy gt Find Resource Current All 9 Router s Clear Take Schedule Routers p savno gt Ce eEE Er behiei Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 146 Patch a PathFinderPC Bay File Routers Scenes UserPanels Meter Bridge Toolbars View Window Help ai Contro Roter or EEE Greun ead TestNonTerm Jes 0 Description E InsertSource_1a ON DanLivewire gt AirChain_ screen a InsertSource_1a AirChain_1 Routes Scenes l TestNonTem y Destination with PE Studio_1 AirChain_2 Studio_1 ON DanLivewire gt AirChain_2 ON D Source 1 PE Studio_4 O AirChain_3 Studio_4 ON DanLivewire gt AirChain_3 ON D router Studio_1 y af stucio 1 O sirchain_4 Studio_1 ON DanLivewire gt AirChain_4 ON D list Destination z PE Studio_1 Studio_1 ON DanLivewire gt AirChain_5 ON D open iChain z y a Studio 1 Studio_1 ON DanLivewire gt AirChain_6 ON D gt gt Studio_1 Air J Lock Wf SAVIAO 1 O airchein_8 af Studio_3 O saviso 1 Clear Take af None O saviao2 E a None O saviao 3 None
295. xia NIC on Server B into the clustering communications section i Server B Cross Over NIC 1 11 Server B Cross Over NIC 2 111 Server B Axia Network NIC c Enter the IP addresses for the Business and Axia Networks for Server B into the Client Communications Section i Server B Business NIC address 11 Server B Axia NIC address 11 Click OK and Select Yes to say that this server has the definitive configuration 12 Install PathfinderPC Server on Server B 13 Next you have two options a Option A use a thumb drive to copy the cluster xml file from ServerA to Server B i Launch the Server and cancel the router config then select the cluster tab and watch the servers synchronize b Option B launch the PathfinderPC Server application and cancel the router config and manually enter the clustering information into Server B so that it matches what we did in Server A i When done select No to indicate that the router configuration files should be pulled from ServerA ii Watch the synchronization take place Notes of importance It is always recommended to include the Axia NIC card as the NIC of last resort for clustering communications This is because PathfinderPC Server determines which of the hosts listed in the Cluster xml file is the local instance of PathfinderPC Server by comparing that IP list with the IP addresses on the local computer If both cross over NICs are down as they may be if the other host computer is turned off no clust
296. y moving the scroll bar at the bottom of the list O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 25 E Description Hidden SilenceLevel ClipLevel gt CLY DeskMic ON PSIO 001 055 PSIO 02 ON PSIO 001 055 PSIO 03 ON PSIO 001 055 PSIO 04 ON PSIO 001 055 PSIO 05 ON PSIO 001 055 PSIO 06 ON PSIO 001 055 PSIO 07 ON PSIO 001 055 PSIO 08 ON PSIO 001 055 Proc Output ON Omnia ONE Pgm 1 ON Romulus Pgm 2 ON Romulus Pam 4 Rerd ON Romulus Aux Send 1 ON Romulus Aux Send 2 ON Romulus CR Direct ON Romulus CR Monitor ON Romulus CR Headphn ON Romulus opo0o00000000000000 The Hidden checkbox allows you to hide Axia Audio and or GPIO points from the system This is useful when the system has discovered IOs that are not currently in use This allows the Administrator to hide those IOs so that they are no longer visible to the system Please note that hiding an IO is a global setting If you hide it that IO will not be available for pathfinder routing events or control A good example of where this is useful is with VMIXers When you scan the network Engines will report many IOs for VMIXers If you are not using VMIXers you can hide these IOs so they do not clutter up the system Then if you need to use them at a later date simply unhide them The Silence Level and ClipLevel allow you to override the Silence and Clip thresholds on an IO by
297. you selected in the previous step to create Stacking Events Protocol Translator If you have just started the server ME Router Setup x application for the first time the screen below may appear automatically without clicking the Add Router button prompting you to create your first router Select the Type of Router Avi wounro A in Axia Livewire Audio Cancel lt Back Next gt gt Finish The following sections of this document discuss the options for setting up the different kinds of routers PathfinderPC supports O Software Authority Inc Axia Audio TLS Corp Page 21 Axia Livewire Routing System Axia Audio GPIO IPort Mpeg The Axia Livewire routing system is unique in the world of routers in that it is a distributed system This means instead of all of the facility s audio wires coming to a single router in a central location the audio wires can be wired to individual Livewire terminals in the separate rooms These Livewire terminals then each connect to a central Ethernet Switch network with a single Ethernet cable for each unit As a routing system instead of the PathfinderPC Server communicating to one central unit the server knows about all of the individual terminals on the LAN and monitors each of them presenting the client application with the appearance of a single router In order to accomplish this each Livewire device must have a unique IP address
298. ze database settings and event system changes automatically This allows both machines to have a continuously accurate set of data If one or the other server fails the other will automatically take over critical operations In addition PathfinderPC Server clustering will automatically load balance incoming PathfinderPC Client connections between the two servers If one server has a higher load of client connections additional connections will be redirected to the other server In this manner PathfinderPC Server clustering offers both reliability and redundancy PathfinderPC Server Clustering is an application level clustering solution This means that a cluster can be created with any operating system that supports PathfinderPC Server It does not use Microsoft clustering so you do not need the expensive Advanced Server operating systems to create a PathfinderPC Server Cluster See the System requirements section at the beginning of this document for details and assistance in choosing the PathfinderPC Server operating system Microsoft Standard Server is the recommended operating system to use for scalability reasons Clustering is included in the PathfinderPC Server application but requires a PathfinderPC Pro license to be purchased which includes licenses for both servers in the cluster on which PathfinderPC Server is to be run In fact two servers with the same license will not synchronize properly They must have different license keys Both operating

PathfinderPC Router Control Software

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents